www. ElectricalPartManuals. com !tell Cutler-Hammer I.L A WARNING Instructions for Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit

Transcription

1 !tell Cutler-Hammer I.L Table of Contents Instructions for Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Page 1.0 General Description Protection Information Testing UL Listed Devices Principle of Operation General Trip and Operation Indicators Test Provisions DIScriminator (Making Current Release) OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) Zone Interlocking Protection Settings General Long Delay Current Settings Long Delay Time Settings Short Delay Current Settings Short Delay Time Settings Instantaneous Current Settings NO Instantaneous Current Settings Ground Fault Current Settings Ground Fault Time Delay Settings Test Procedure General When To Test Test Provision Conducting Tests Control Power Not Tripping the Breaker Tripping the Breaker Battery (Inside the Rating Plug) General Battery Check Battery Replacement Auxiliary Power Module Frame Ratings, (where applicable, Sensor Ratings) and Rating Plugs References Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies Type DS Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers Series C% R-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Appendix A Zone Interlocking - Example... 15, Supersedes I.L. 29 BB5A dated September 1994 A WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL OR PERFORM MAIN TENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENERGIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT NO VOLTAGE IS PRESENT BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE TASK, AND ALWAYS FOLLOW GENERALLY ACCEPTED SAFETY PROCEDURES. CUTLER-HAMMER IS NOT LIABLE FOR THE MISAPPLICATION OR MISINSTAL LATION OF ITS PRODUCTS. It is strongly urged that the user observe all recommendations, warnings and cautions relating to the safety of personnel and equipment, as well as general and local health and safety laws, codes, and procedures. The recommendations and information contained herein are based on experience and judgment, but should not be considered to be all-inclusive or covering every application or circumstance which may arise. If you have any questions or need further information or instructions, please contact your local representative, or the Customer Support Center for the type of circuit breaker you have: Circuit Call Send to Breaker Telephone FAX Type Number Number DS/DSL ( 412) (41 2) SPB (412) (412) Series c R-Frame (41 2) (41 2) GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.1 Protection The Digitrip RMS 510, illustrated in Fig. 1, is a custom application specific integrated circuit based trip unit suitable for use in types DS and DSL low voltage AC power circuit breakers and type SPB Systems Pow-R circuit breakers and Series c R-Frame molded case circuit breakers. The Digitrip RMS 510 provides true RMS current sensing for proper correlation with thermal characteristics of conductors and equipment. Interchangeable rating plugs are provided to establish the continuous current rating of each circuit breaker.

2 Page 2 The Digitrip RMS 51 0 Trip Unit is completely self-contained and when the circuit breaker is closed, requires no external control power to operate its protection systems. It operates from current signal levels and control power derived through current sensors integrally mounted in the circuit breaker. The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is available in six different types. Each trip unit may be equipped with a maximum of five phase and two ground (time-current) adjustments to meet specific application requirements. The types of protection available for each model include the following, which are illustrated in Figures 2.1 through 2.6: Protection Long Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Short Time Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/ Ground Fig. 1 Circuit Breaker Assembly Cell Location Reference LED's light ''RED" to indicate cause of trip Time-Current Curve for Ground Protection View Settings in Window Types Ll* LS* LSI* LIG LSG LSIG Refer to Figure Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Model LSIG with Rating Plug I.L Note*: RMS Digitrip Type Ll, LS, and LSI trip units can be applied on 3-pole or 4-pole circuit breakers for protection of the neutral circuit, IF the circuit breaker is wired and MARKED for NEUTRAL PROTECTION. Refer to the National Electric Code for appropriate application of 4-pole breakers. 1.2 Information Light Emitting Diodes (LED's) on the face of the trip unit light "Red" to indicate the reason for an automatic trip operation. The battery in the rating plug maintains the reason for trip indication following an automatic trip operation, until the "TRIP RESET" button is pushed. The "Green" LED in the lower right corner "blinks" to indicate the trip unit is operating normally. The battery in the rating plug is "OK" if the LED lights "Green" when the "battery check" button next to it is pushed. (See Section 6.). Note: The Digitrip RMS 510 provides all of its protection functions regardless of the status of the battery. The battery serves only to maintain the indication of the reason for automatic trip. Adjust Protection Settings for Desired Values with Rotary Switches, Trip Unit - Operational Status "Blinking Green"=OK

3 I.L Fig Fig. 2.2 Long Time/Instantaneous Protection (L/) Long Time/Short Time Protection (LS) Fig. 2.3 Fig. 2.4 Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Protection (LSI) Page 3 Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (L/G)

4 Page 4 Fig Testing Long Time/Short Time/Ground/Protection (LSG) To test the trip unit, use the integral test panel. (See Section 5.0.) 2.0 UL LISTED DEVICES Digitrip RMS 51 0 Trip Units are "Listed" by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Under UL File E7819, for use in types DS, DSL, SPB and Series c R-Frame circuit breakers. 3.0 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 3.1 General The Digitrip RMS 510 trip unit is designed for use in industrial circuit breaker environments where the ambient temperatures can range from -20 C to +85 C and rarely exceed 70 to 75 C. If, however, temperatures in the neighborhood of the trip unit do exceed this range, the trip unit performance may be degraded. In order to insure that the tripping function is not compromised due to an over-temperature condition, the Digitrip RMS 510 microcomputer chip has a built-in over-temperature protection feature, factory set to trip the breaker if the chip temperature exceeds 95 C. If over-temperature is the reason for the trip, the Long Delay Time LED will light "RED". Fig. 2.6 I.L Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LS/G) The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip unit provides three basic functions: Protection, Information and Testing. A typical trip unit and rating plug are illustrated in Fig. 1. Individual product instruction leaflets referenced in Section 9.0 illustrate typical Digitrip RMS Trip Units installed in specific breakers. The trip unit employs the Cutler-Hammer Inc. custom designed integrated circuit S11RE + chip, which includes a microcomputer to perform its numeric and logic functions. The principle of operation is described by the block diagram shown in Fig. 3. In the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, all required sensing and tripping power to operate its protection function is derived from the current sensors in the circuit breaker. The secondary currents from these sensors provide the correct input information for the protection functions, as well as tripping power, whenever the circuit breaker is carrying current. These current signals develop analog voltages across the appropriate calibrating resistors including: 1) Phase currents 2) Ground current (when supplied) 3) Rating plug The resulting analog voltages are digitized by the custom designed integrated circuits.

5 I.L Page 5 Fig. 3 A B c N I I,l,l,l_ t t t ' : ) ) :------_j T pocal Phase OrG ound Calol>r h<jn Re<;,stor r Digitrip RMS 510 Block Diagram with Breaker Interface The microcomputer, in cyclic fashion, repeatedly scans the voltage values across each calibrating resistor and enters these values into its Random Access Memory (RAM). These data are used to calculate true RMS current values, which are then repeatedly compared with the protection function settings and other operating data stored in the Read Only Memory (ROM). The software program then determines whether to initiate protection functions, including tripping the breaker through the low energy trip device (Flux Transfer Shunt Trip or Direct Trip Actuator) in the circuit breaker. 3.2 Trip and Operation Indicators The LEOs, shown in Figs. 1 and , on the face of the trip unit, light "RED" to indicate the reason for any automatic trip operation. As indicated in Figs , each LED is strategically located in the related segment of the time-current curve depicted on the face of the trip unit. The reason for trip is identified by the segment of the time-current curve where the LED is lighted "RED". Following an automatic trip operation, the back-up battery, continues to supply power to the LEOs as indicated in Figs. 3 and 6. To check the status of the battery, see Section 6. Push the ''Trip Reset" button shown in Fig. 1, to turn "Off" the LEOs following a trip operation. A green colored LED, as shown in Fig. 1, indicates the operational status of the trip unit. Once the load current through the circuit breaker exceeds approximately 10% of the frame/current sensor rating, the green LED will flash "On" and "Off" once each second, to indicate the trip unit is energized and operating properly. Note: If the LED is steadily "GREEN", i.e. not flashing, the trip unit is not ready. Integrated Circuit 5-LRE+ TM Chip 3.3 Test Provisions (See Section 5.0) li':s :co FP - : 1. ong SeeSewon4 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) (For Types LS and LSG trip units only.) TnpUnn Opera!mg Stalu' ln<:l cator (Fias lnq GREENind catesokr SeeSewon3.2 When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous protection setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, a making current release (or DIScriminator) circuit is provided. This circuit will prevent the circuit breaker from being closed and latched-in on a faulted circuit. The non-adjustable release is pre-set at eleven (1 1) times the installed rating plug current (In). The making current release is enabled only for the first ten (1 0) cycles following an initial circuit breaker closing operation, provided the load current exceeds approximately 10% of the circuit breaker frame (or current sensor) rating. Should the load current through the circuit breaker drop to less than the 10% value, the release will reset. The release, once reset, will remain enabled until the load current passing through the circuit breaker has exceeded the 10% value for 10 cycles. The making current release will trip the circuit breaker instantaneously. In the event the breaker is intended to close (but not to trip out again) into a circuit whose current could initially be higher than 11 x In, it is possible to make the DIScriminator inactive. If the breaker does close onto a fully rated fault current, when the DIScriminator is inactive, the breaker will wait for the full short-time delay setting before it trips. The DIScriminator (making current release) can be made inactive by turning the "OVERRIDE/" setting switch (nearest the bottom edge of the trip unit) from the "DIS" position, to the "[BLANK]" position. (See Figs. 2.2 and 2.5.)

6 Page 6 Notes: 1 This switch has eight (8) positions, and seven (7) of them show "DIS' in the window, while ONLY ONE position shows "[BLANK]". 2 When the "OVERRIDE/'' window shows "[BLANK]", the only fast-acting high short-circuit protection available is the OVERRIDE [Fixed Instantaneous]. (See 3.5 below.) 3.5 OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) (For Types LS And LSG Trip Units Only) When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, the Fixed Instantaneous "Override" analog trip circuit is automatically pre-set to a value no greater than the short-time withstand current rating of the circuit breaker in which the trip unit is installed. Since the specific values vary for different circuit breaker types and ratings, refer to time-current curves, listed in Section 9, for the values applicable to your breaker. If breaker trips due to high instantaneous current, the "OVERRIDE" LED will light "RED". 3.6 Zone Interlocking Zone Selective Interlocking (or Zone Interlocking) is available (see Fig. 3) for Digitrip RMS Trip Units having Short Delay and/or Ground Fault protection. Zone Selective Interlocking provides the fastest possible tripping for faults within the breaker's zone of protection, and yet also provides positive coordination among all breakers in the system (mains, ties, feeders and downstream breakers) to limit the outage to the affected part of the system only. When Zone Interlocking is enabled, a fault within the breaker's zone of protection will cause the RMS DIG ITRIP trip unit to: a) Trip the affected breaker instantaneously, and at the same time b) Send a signal to upstream RMS DIGITRIP trip units to restrain from tripping immediately. The restraining signal causes the upstream breakers to follow their set coordination times, so that only the minimum service is disrupted, while the fault is cleared in the shortest time possible. (This signal requires only a single pair of wires from the output terminals of the downstream breaker's trip unit to the input terminals of the upstream breaker's trip unit. For specific instructions see the applicable connection diagrams for your breaker listed in Section 9.0.) I.L Note: If a breaker (M) receives a Zone Interlocking signal from another breaker (F), but the fault current level is less than the trip unit setting for breaker (M), the signal from the other breaker (F) will not cause breaker (M) to trip. A CAUTION IF ZONE INTERLOCKING IS NOT TO BE USED (I.E. STANDARD TIME-DELAY COORDINATION ONLY IS INTENDED), THE ZONE INTERLOCKING TERMINALS MUST BE CONNECTED WITH JUMPER WIRES, AS SPECIFIED ON THE CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR YOUR BREAKER (SEE SECTION 9.0), SO THE TIME DELAY SETTINGS WILL PROVIDE THE INTENDED COORDINATION. For an example of how Zone Selective Interlocking may be used, See Appendix A. 4.0 PROTECTION SETTINGS 4.1 General Prior to placing circuit breaker in operation, each trip unit protection setting must be set to the values specified by the engineer responsible for the installation. The number of settings that must be made is determined by the protector model supplied as illustrated in Figs. 2.1 through 2.6. Each setting is made with a rotary switch, using a small screwdriver. The selected setting for each adjustment appears in its respective rectangular viewing window as illustrated in Fig. 1. The installed rating plug establishes the maximum continuous current rating of the circuit breaker (In). Instantaneous and ground current settings are defined in multiples of (In). To illustrate the effect of each protection curve setting, simulated Time-Current curves are pictured on the face of the trip unit. The rotary switch to make each setting is located nearest that portion of the simulated Time-Current curve it controls. Should an automatic "trip" occur (as a result of the current exceeding the pre-selected value), the LED in the appropriate segment of the simulated Time-Current curve will light "RED" indicating the reason for "trip". The available settings, along with the illustrated effect of changing the settings, are given in Figs. 4.1 through 4.7.

7 I.L Long Delay Current Setting There are eight (8) available Long Delay Settings, as illustrated in Fig Each setting, called "/;' is expressed as a multiple (ranging from.5 to 1) of the rating plug current (In) Note: "t," is also the basis for the Short-Delay Current Setting. (See Section 4.4.) Fig Long Delay Setting 1, OJx I n = 1, Long Delay Current Settings 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting I, Available Settings.5,.6,.7,.8,.85,.9,.95, 1 In Multiples of Rating Plug Amperes (l n l There are eight (8) available Long Delay Time Settings, as illustrated in Fig. 4.2, ranging from 2 to 24 seconds. These settings are the total clearing times when the current value equals six (6) times t,. Fig. 4.2 Notes: 6xl, Long Delay Time Settings Available Settings 2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24 Seconds at 6 Times Long Delay Setting (1,) 1) In addition to the standard Long Delay Protection Element, the Digitrip RMS 51 0 trip unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. If a breaker is reclosed soon after a Long Delay Trip, and the current again exceeds the Long Delay Setting, t, the LTM automatically reduces the time to trip, to Page 7 allow for the fact that the load circuit temperature is already higher than normal, due to the prior overload condition. Each time an overload condition is repeated, the LTM causes the breaker to trip in a time progressively earlier than the "Long Delay Time Setting". When the load current returns to normal, the LTM begins to reset; and after about 10 minutes it has reset fully, so that next Long Delay trip time will again be the "Setting" value. In certain applications it may be desirable to disable the LTM function. The LTM function can be disabled by (first opening the breaker and then) removing the Rating Plug (See Figures 1 and 6), and lastly moving the LTM jumper (inside the rating plug cavity, See figure 4.2.1) to its "INAC TIVE" connection. (You can enable the LTM function again any time you wish by moving the LTM jumper back to its original "ACTIVE" connection.).- Rating Plug Cavity {../ t..L Standard from Factory "L TM Active" ---- Fig Long Time Memory "LTM" Jumper The action of the LTM is a factor to consider in performing multiple Long Delay Time tests. (See Section 5.4.) 2) There is a condition under which the Long Delay Trip LED can erroneously indicate a LOT has occurred, even though the breaker is still closed. This can happen when an overload current momentarily exceeds the Long Delay Current Setting, t,, so that the Long Delay LED flashes "RED" to indicate the overload condition. Then if, at the very moment when the LED is "ON", the load current would then suddenly drop to a value less than 10% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating, the trip unit stops functioning while the "4bit Latch Chip" (See Fig. 3) is set and the LED remains Lighted. If the current would again increase to a value above the Long Delay Current Setting, t,, and then return to normal, the

8 Page 8 LOT will reset itself. You can of course, manually clear the LOT (or any other trip indication) at any time, by pushing the "PUSH to RESET" button. (See Figure 1.) 4.4 Short Delay Current Setting There are eight (8) available Short Delay Current Settings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times lr and the other two settings are "S1" or "S2" times lr (REMEMBER: lr is the Long Delay Current Setting). The values that "S1" and "S2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section Short Delay Time Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.4, there are two different Short Delay curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2 t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2 t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the short delay current range than will the flat response.... -<n... Short Fig. 4.3 {"... Available Settings '. Delay ''Dḍ'... Setting J , 6, S,, S, ' -.. r' , t I m,, 1: ;, I \ e l := ) I L 51 and 52 Values are Specified on Rating Plug Short Delay Current Settings '" M""'" "' Long Delay Setting Five flat (.1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2 t (.1 *,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2 t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the viewing window. The 1 2 t response is applicable to currents less than eight (8) times lr, the Long Delay Setting. For currents greater than 8 times lr, the 1 2 t response reverts to the flat response. Note: See also Section 3.6, Zone Interlocking, above. 4.6 Instantaneous Current Setting There are eight (8) available Instantaneous Current Settings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times (In) the rating plug value, and the I.L other two settings are "M1" or "M2" times (In) The values that "M1" and "M2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section NO Instantaneous Current Setting For types LS and LSG trip units, please see Sections 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) and 3.5 OVER RIDE (Fixed Instantaneous), for available fast-acting high short-circuit protection. 4.8 Ground Fault Current Setting The eight (8) Ground Fault Current Settings are labeled with the code letters "A" through "K" (except there are no "G" or "I" settings), as illustrated in Fig In general, the specific current settings range from 0.25 to 1.0 times (In), the rating plug value, but cannot exceed 1200 A. The specific Ground Current Settings for each letter are listed in Ta ble 1 and on the applicable Time-Current curve for the breaker. Fig. 4.4 i4 Sho. Delay Time [}] Sec. 0 Lkil M r, \-l, 1 1-.J L_-:= J..._...;::;;].-. ;5 I I '-J I _]ill lj (,. ' T 1,", "'j I M.,...,,_ -, I - -=] I I l-.j "*"In Viewing Window r'l Indicates 1 1 l't Shape 1...) 8 xi, Short Delay Time Settings.1,.2,.3,..5 Seconds WI h Flat Respon, e l't Shape Returns to Flat Response at Cu rre 1ts Higher than 8 x 1, Seconds with 12t Shape

9 I.L Fig. 4.5 M1 and M2 Values are Specified on Rating Plug Instantaneous Current Settings Available Settings , 3, 4. 5, 6, M,, M2 In Multiples of Rating Plug Amperes O n i Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Setting Fig. 4.6 Gnd-Fault m xln e m Available Setting s A, 8, C, D, E, F. H, K Ground Fa ult Current Settings Specific Values Given on Circuit Breaker Time-Current Curve an d in Table 1 TABLE 1 -GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS (AMPERES)CD Page 9 A B c D E F H K BO BB BB 250 c BO Cii LU a: LU BO a B 1B B BOO BO BO C!l ::J a BO C!l B B 1200 z BO BOO a: BOO LU B en 3000/ BOO B CD Tolerances on settings are ±1 0% of values shown. cv Refer to Type DS, type SPB or Series C A-Frame supplemental instruction leaflets given in Section 9 for list of available rating plugs for each type circuit breaker. 4.9 Ground Fault Time Delay Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.7, there are two different Ground Fault curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2 t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2 t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the ground fault current range than will the flat response. Five flat (.1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2 t (.1*,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2 t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the setting viewing window. The 1 2 t response is applicable to currents less than times the ampere rating of the installed rating plug (In)- For currents greater than x In the 1 2 t response reverts to the flat response. 473

10 .c om I.L Page 1 0 Available "Test Amps" Settings \ Gnd, \ [}) {0 - """' I I I I I : Time L Trip Reset Available Settings.1,.2,.3,.4, Unit Status.5 Seconds with Flat Response "' I / e u on ] nw "*"In Viewing Indicates l't do ' ' I ---.1*,.3*, n 1. 5*. Seconds w1th l't Shape I -. ' ',.._ --l ' ' - ---_I Ground Fault Time Delay Settings Note: See also Section 3.6 on Zone Interlocking. DANG E R tri A ca 5.0 TEST PROCEDURES 5.1 General lec D O NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL, TEST OR PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENER GIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP M ENT..E DE-ENERGIZE THE CIRCUIT AND DISCONN ECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTE NANCE OR TESTS. As illustrated in Figs. 1 and 5, an integral test panel is provided to test the Digitrip RMS 51 0 Trip Unit. w Several no-trip settings are provided to check the trip unit operation without actually tripping the circuit breaker. ww Push, then release Trip Reset button to reset Trip Unit. Required following all automatic trip and test operations. Integral Test Panel (Lower Right Corner of Trip Unit) A CAUTI O N TESTING A CIRCUIT B REAKER U NDER "TRI P CON DITIONS" WHILE IT IS IN SERVICE AND CARRYING LOAD CURRENT, WHETHER DONE BY INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL MEANS, IS NOT R ECOMM ENDED. lp Fig Shape Wi I :.._...'...'-l... Approximately 1 0 tm I II Fig. 5 l't Shape Ret r s to Flat R sp nse at ar 0 0 "GFT" = Ground Current Test and TRIPS breaker; "GF" = G round Current Test NO breaker TRIP. See Section for inser vice test trip li Push, then release Test button to test. Test operation begins with release of pushbutton. _ :_-- I I I I I x In () c=--= J i: TRIP; Test Amps Sec. : I \.. :)) Fault CD "6T" = Phase Current Test at 6xln and TRIPS breaker; " 1, 2, 3, 8 or 1 0" x I = Phase Current Test - N01;reaker ua ls \\ \ an \ Breaker Trips At 6T and GFT ANY TRIPPING OPERATION WILL CAUSE DISRUP TION O F SERVICE AND POSSIB LE PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM U NNECESSARY SWITCH ING OF CONNECTED EQUIPMENT. TESTING OF A CIRCUIT BREAKER THAT RESULTS IN THE TRIPPING O F THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE DONE O N LY WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN THE "TEST" OR " DISCONNECTED" CELL POSITIONS OR WHILE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS ON A TEST BENCH. To preserve the primary protection function of the trip unit, all in-service testing under "Trip" or "No-Trip" condi tions are only performed at load cu rrent values no greater than 50% of the Long Delay Cu rrent Setting, 1,. Any attempt to conduct in-service testing when the load cur rent exceeds 50% of 1,, will not be executed by the trip unit. Since the Digitrip RMS Trip U n it is completely self powered using energy derived from the current sensors installed in the circuit breaker, all in-service tests con ducted should be conducted with the auxiliary control power mod u le, shown in Fig. 7, plugged into the trip unit. This action will avoid difficulties caused by load current levels that are too low to operate the trip unit. Effective May 1 997

11 I.L When To Test Tests can be conducted with the breaker in the "connected" cell position while carrying load current. However, as stated in the caution note in Section 5.1, good practice will limit circuit breaker in-service "trip tests", where required, to maintenance periods during times of minimum load conditions. Testing, prior to start-up can best be accomplished with the breaker out of its cell or in the 'Test", "Disconnected" or "Withdrawn" (or Removed) cell positions. Note: Since time-current settings are based on desired system coordination and protection schemes, the protection settings selected and preset in accordance with Section 4.0 above should not be altered during or as a part of any routine test sequence. 5.3 Test Provision As indicated in Fig. 5, six different 'Test Amps" settings (1, 2, 3, 6T, 8 and 1 OX In) are available for testing the phase elements of the trip unit, and two (GF, GFT) are provided for testing the ground elements. A CAUTION A SETTING OF EITHER 6T OR GFT WILL TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. (SEE SECTION BELOW.) For any combination of the phase protection settings, an appropriate "No Trip" condition can be set to test the long time, short time and instantaneous trip settings without tripping the circuit breaker. In the "GF" test position, the level of test current based on In, is adequate to demonstrate the operating condition of the trip unit without tripping the circuit breaker. This is a functional check only, not a calibration. 5.4 Conducting Tests 1 ) Before starting any test sequence, check the Unit Status (Green LED) in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) to be sure it is blinking on and off about once each second, which indicates that the trip unit is functioning normally. In the event the Unit Status LED is not blinking, install an Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7), or if you have one already, check to see that it is connected correctly. 2) If the circuit breaker is carrying current, check for the following conditions: Page 1 1 a) the current is not less than 10% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating; be sure the "GREEN" Unit Status LED (in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) is blinking on and off (indicating that there is enough current flowing to provide the power necessary to operate the trip unit). In the event the Unit Status LED is either lighted "GREEN" or "OFF" continuously, there is NOT enough current flowing to power the trip unit; and an APM (See Fig. 7) should be installed before proceeding with the test. and b) the current is not more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting (1,) ; because the trip unit will not execute your test instructions when it senses that the current through the breaker exceeds the 50% level. 3) When performing tests on the Long Delay element, be aware that in addition to the standard protection element, the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit also has a Long Time Memory function {LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. (See NOTE 1 under Section 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting.) The action of the LTM will have the same effect of advancing the Long Delay Trip Time if multiple Long Delay Time tests are performed repeatedly - as one might do in making single phase tests on each pole of a breaker in succession, for example. If you have sufficient experience in performing tests with this kind of accelerated trip timing, you may be comfortable with the results of tests performed in quick succession. However, if there is any question, you may simply wait about ten (10) minutes after a Long Delay Trip for the LTM to reset, before you check the next pole Control Power For testing the trip unit, an optional Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) as shown in Fig. 7 is recommended. This Auxiliary Power Module, which operates from a separate 120 Vac supply, may be used when a drawout circuit breaker is in any of its four cell positions, i.e., "Connected", 'Test", "Disconnected" and "Withdrawn" (or "Removed.") Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without

12 Page 12 the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well-above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Plug in the Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) to insure control power is available for testing. When the APM is properly connected the "GREEN" Unit Status LED will blink on and off about once per second Not Tripping the Breaker 1. Place the "Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the six "No Trip" test settings, i.e., 1, 2, 3, 8, or 10, x In, or GF Depress the (Black) 'Test" pushbutton and release it - the test starts when the pushbutton is released. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected "No Trip" test value, then the LED related to that function will turn on signifying successful completion of the test action. Note: During the long delay tests the Long Delay LED flashes "RED". 4. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the 'Trip Reset" pushbutton. All LEOs lighted by the "No Trip" test action should turn "OFF". Should an actual overload or fault condition occur during an in-service, "No Trip Test" sequence, the protection function will override the test function, and the circuit breaker will trip automatically in accordance with the actual Time-Current settings. Note: The "Trip Reset" pushbutton may be depressed at any time. However, should a test already be in progress, the test would be aborted. A test initiated via the integral test panel may be aborted at any time by depressing the 'Trip Reset" pushbutton Tripping the Breaker 1. Make sure that the circuit breaker is carrying no current. (See CAUTION notes under Section 5.1.) NOTE: In the event it is decided to perform a "Breaker Trip Test" while load current is flowing, make sure the circuit breaker is carrying no more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting 1,. (The I.L trip unit will not execute your instructions to Test itself, when the load current exceeds 50% of /r) 2. Place the ''Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the two "Trip" test settings, i.e., 6T or GFT. 3. Depress the black "Test" pushbutton (See Fig. 5) and release it - the test is initiated when the pushbutton is released. 4. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected 'Test Amps" value, the circuit breaker will trip and the LED related to that function will light "RED". 5. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the 'Trip Reset" pushbutton (See Fig. 5). All LEOs lighted by the 'Trip" test action should turn "OFF". 6.0 BATTERY (INSIDE THE RATING PLUG) 6.1 General The battery has no part in the protection function of the trip unit. As indicated in Figs. 3 and 6, the battery is provided to maintain the "RED" LED indication of the cause of TRIP in the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. The battery is located in the rating plug along with a battery check pushbutton and a green battery check LED. 6.2 Battery Check The battery is a long life, lithium photo type unit. The status of the battery can be checked at any time by depressing the battery check pushbutton and observing the "G REEN" LED as shown in Fig. 6. If the battery check LED does not light "GREEN", replace the battery. The condition of the battery has no effect on the protection function of the trip unit. Even with the battery removed, the unit will still trip the breaker in accordance with its settings. However, without the battery, the cause of TRIP LED will not be lighted "RED". If the battery is replaced (or if an Auxiliary Power Module is plugged into the trip unit), one or more of the cause of Trip LED's may be illuminated. The user should push the red 'TRIP RESET' button to turn off the indications, and the trip unit will be ready to indicate the next cause of trip. 6.3 Battery Replacement The battery can be easily replaced from the front of the trip unit by lowering the hinged cover of the rating plug as shown in Fig. 6. The battery can then be removed by pulling the battery tab as shown in Fig. 6.

13 I.L Note: The battery can be replaced at any time, even while the circuit breaker is in service, without affecting the operation of the circuit breaker or its protection function. A CAUTION CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED WHEN REPLACING A BATTERY TO INSURE THAT THE CORRECT POLARITIES ARE OBSERVED. POLARITY MARK INGS ARE SHOWN ON THE RATING PLUG WHEN THE HINGED COVER IS OPEN AS INDICATED IN FIG. 6. The replacement battery should be the same type or equivalent. Acceptable 3.0 volt lithium batteries may be Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Rating Plugs for R-Frame and Sl'B Breakers are Similar Ratmg Plug Idem ification "Battery Check" Pushbuttor ----' Typical Rating Plug Values for Short Delay S1 and S2: Instantaneous M1 and M2 Settings Battery' "OK" if LED Lights "GREEN" when "Battery Check" Button is Pushed Trip Unit Connector (Fits into Keyed Cavity In Top Right Corner of Trip Unit See Fig. 1) --- mot -1!itr>J 4 A ft? frn l.lm>t W111 liii* f>w<'!l':; RidE iif't't$ Auxiliary Power Module Page 13 obtained from the following companies under their type designation indicated: Company Va rta Batteries, Inc. 150 Clarbrook Road Elmsford, N.Y Duracell South Broadway Ta rrytown, N.Y (91 4) Sanyo Electric Inc. Battery Division 200 Riser Road Little Ferry, N.J Rating Plug Retent on Screw I Polarity Marks Model CR 1/3N DL 1/3N CR 1/3N Battery Removal Tab Sattery

14 Page AUXILIARY POWER MODULE The Auxiliary Power Module or APM (Cat No. PRTAAPM), illustrated in Fig. 7, is an encapsulated power supply that requires a 120 Vac input at either 50 or 60 Hz. It provides an output of 32 Vdc (nominal 40 Vdc open circuit) which can be used for testing a Digitrip RMS 51 0 Trip Unit. When a drawout circuit breaker is equipped with a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, it can be conveniently set and tested while the circuit breaker is out of its cell or in its cell in the 'Test", "Disconnect" or "Withdrawn" positions by using the Auxiliary Power Module. The Auxiliary Power Module is equipped with a unique plug-in connector suitable only for plugging into the keyed receptacle in the upper right corner of a Digitrip RMS Trip Unit as shown in Fig. 1. This prohibits the possible use of an incorrect type power module. 8.0 FRAME RATINGS, (WHERE APPLICABLE, SENSOR RATINGS) AND RATING PLUGS The Frame Rating of a circuit breaker is the maximum RMS current it can carry continuously. The maximum Short-Circuit Current Rating of the Circuit breaker are usually related to the Frame Rating as well. It is often times desirable to be able to choose a current value (In), less than the full frame rating, to be the basis fo r the coordination of the circuit breaker's protection functions, without affecting its short-circuit current capability. For the Digitrip 510 trip unit this is implemented by changing the Rating Plug (and/or Current Sensors, where applicable - See your circuit breaker instructions (listed in Section 9.0 below) to determine if this applies to your circuit breaker). The (Current) Sensor Rating (where applicable) is the maximum RMS current the circuit breaker can carry with the specified current sensors installed. The Sensor Rating can be the same or less than the Frame Rating, but not greater. The Rating Plug (See Fig. 6) fits into a special cavity to complete the trip unit (See Fig. 1). Rating plugs have two current ratings listed on their covers (See Fig. 6): 1) the "Must be used with Frame Rated" cur- I.L rent value (or "Sensor Rated", if applicable), and 2) "In (Rated I) =" current value. This latter value, (In) is the basis for the trip unit current settings: 1) The Instantaneous and Ground Current Settings (if provided) are multiples of (In) (See Sections 4.6 and 4.8) 2) The Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, is a multiple of (In). Long Delay Current Setting = 1, = LD x (In). (See Section 4.2) 3) The Short Delay Current Setting (if provided) is indirectly dependent upon (In), because it is a multiple of 1,, which in turn is a multiple of (In). Short Delay Current Setting = SD x 1, = SD X LD X (In). (See Section 4.4) Rating Plugs for the Digitrip RMS 510 trip units are marked for and may be applied on both 50 and 60 Hz systems. A CAUTION BEFORE YOU FIT THE RA TING PLUG INTO THE TRIP UNIT, BE SURE TO CHECK THAT THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RA TING IF APPLICABLE), MA TCH THOSE PRINTED ON THE RA TING PLUG COVER. INSTALLING A RA TING PLUG THA T DOES NOT MA TCH THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RATING, IF APPLICA BLE), CA N PRODUCE SERIOUS MISCOORDINA TION AND/OR FA ILURE OF THE PROTECTION SYSTEM. Complete catalog descriptions of all available rating plugs are given in the applicable circuit breaker supplementary instruction leaflets. (See Section 9) Note: Rating plugs from Digitrip models 500/SOOnOO/ 800 CAN NOT be used with model 51 0 trip units. The connection pins are located in different positions, so that one cannot accidentally use the incorrect kind of plug.

15 I.L REFERENCES 9.1 Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies I.L I.L I.L Instructions for Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip RMS 610 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip RMS 810 Trip Unit 9.2 Type OS Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers I. B I. B AD SC SC SC B508 Instructions for Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Types OS and DSL Supplement B to Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Types OS and DSL Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Connection Diagram for Type OS Circuit Breakers 9.3 Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers I.L I.L AD SC SC SC I.S Instruction for the Systems Pow-R Breaker and Drawout Mechanism Supplementary Instructions for the Systems Pow-R Breaker used with the Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breaker Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) SPB Master Connection Diagram 9.4 Series c R-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers 29C C107 29C713 AD R SC SC SC Frame Book Frame Instruction Leaflet Supplementary Instructions for Series c R-Frame used with the Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for R-Frame Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Page 15 I.L. 29C714 Master Connection Diagram for Series c R-Frame Circuit Breaker APPENDIX A ZONE INTERLOCKING Assume a ground fault of 2000 Amperes occurs and refer to Fig A.1. CASE 1 : There is no Zone Selective Interlocking. {standard time delay coordination is used) Fault 3 The branch breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.1 s. Fault 2 The feeder breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.3 s. Fault 1 The breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.5 s. CASE 2: There is Zone Selective Interlocking Fault 3 The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault and Z3 will send an interlocking signal to the Z2 trip unit; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to Z1. Z1 and Z2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the branch breaker Z3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker Z2 will clear the fault in 0.3 s (as above). Similarly, in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 2 The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to the Z1 trip unit. Z1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 1 There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s. Figure A.2 presents a Zone Selective Interlocking connection diagram for a system with two main breakers from incoming sources and a bus tie breaker. Note the blocking diode 01 is needed so that the feeder breakers can send interlocking signals to both the main and tie breakers, without having the tie breaker send itself an interlocking signal.

16 Page 16 Fig. A. 1 f Q) 1 N t N Q) c 2 0 N t Q) c 0 N Fig. A A ) 1600 A ) 3 I 200 A ) Main 0.5 Sec 1200 A Feeder 0.3 Sec 400 A Branch Z1 Z2 0.1 Sec Z3 100A Typical Zone Interlocking (Ground Fault Protection) M Sec 0.1 Sec I.L Notes: A1 : Wiring to be twisted pair of AWG No. 14 to AWG No. 20. Route Zone Interlocking wiring separate from power conductors. DO NOT GROUND any Zone Interlock Wiring. M2 0.5 Sec F21 A2: The maximum distance between first and last zone is 250 feet (1 1 0 m). A3 : A Maximum of 20 breakers may be connected in parallel in one Zone. F22 2 Legend =Common (Ungrounded) =Short Delay Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Short Delay I nput Signal from Lower Level Zone =Ground Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Ground Input Signal from Lower Level Zone /ault at Location 2 F Sec 0.1 Sec 0.1 Sec Typical Zone Interlocking Connections with Two Main Breakers (M 1, M2) and a Tie Breaker (T) (Short Delay Protection) IF! f"" N

17 I.L Page 17 NOTES

18 Page 18 I.L NOTES

19 I.L Page 19 NOTES

20 Page 20 This instruction booklet is published solely for information purposes and should not be considered all inclusive. If further information is required, you should consult Cutler-Hammer. Sale of product shown in this literature is subject to terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Cutler-Hammer Inc. selling policies or other contractual agreement between the parties. This literature is not intended to and does not enlarge or add to any such contract. The sole source governing the rights and remedies of any purchaser of this equipment is the contract between the purchaser and Cutler-Hammer Inc. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY, OR WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAG E OF TRADE, ARE MADE REGARDING THE INFORMAT ION, RECOMMENDAT IONS AND DESCRIPTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN. In no event will Cutler-Hammer Inc. be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damage or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment, plant or power system, cost of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities, or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the use of the information, recommendations and description contained herein. Cutler-Hammer Inc Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, U.S.A. Style No. 7829C35H03 Printed in U.S.A./CCI I.L

21 ltciju Cutler-Hammer I.L Table of Contents Instructions for Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Page 1.0 General Description Protection Information Testing UL Listed Devices Principle of Operation General Trip and Operation Indicators Test Provisions DIScriminator (Making Current Release) OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) Zone Interlocking Protection Settings General Long Delay Current Settings Long Delay Time Settings Short Delay Current Settings Short Delay Time Settings Instantaneous Current Settings NO Instantaneous Current Settings Ground Fault Current Settings Ground Fault Time Delay Settings Test Procedure General When To Test Test Provision Conducting Tests Control Power Not Tripping the Breaker Tripping the Breaker Battery (Inside the Rating Plug) General Battery Check Battery Replacement Auxiliary Power Module Frame Ratings, (where applicable, Sensor Ratings) and Rating Plugs References Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies Type DS Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers Series C% R-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Appendix A Zone Interlocking - Example... 15, Supersedes IL A dated September 1994 A WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL OR PERFORM MAIN TENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENERGIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT '" _... ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT NO VOLTAGE IS PRESENT BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE TAS K, AND ALWAYS FOLLOW GENERALLY ACCEPTED SAFETY PROCEDURES. CUTLER-HAMMER IS NOT LIABLE FOR THE MISAPPLICATION OR MISINSTAL LATION OF ITS PRODUCTS. It is strongly urged that the user observe all recommendations, warnings and cautions relating to the safety of personnel and equipment, as well as general and local health and safety laws, codes, and procedures. The recommendations and information contained herein are based on experience and judgment, but should not be considered to be all-inclusive or covering every application or circumstance which may arise. If you have any questions or need further information or instructions, please contact your local representative, or the Customer Support Center for the type of circuit breaker you have: Circuit Call Send to Breaker Telephone FAX Type Number Number DS/DSL (412) (412) SPB (412) (41 2) Series c R-Frame (412) (412) GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.1 Protection The Digitrip RMS 510, illustrated in Fig. 1, is a custom application specific integrated circuit based trip unit suitable for use in types DS and DSL low voltaq,_e;l AC power _ circuit breakers and type SPB Systems Pow-R circuit breakers and Series c R-Frame molded case cirr:-. 1t. breakers. The Digitrip RMS 510 provides true RMS current sensing fo r proper correlation with thermal characteristics of conductors and equipment. Interchangeable rating plugs are provided to establish the continuous current rating of each circuit breaker.

22 Page 2 The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is completely self-contained and when the circuit breaker is closed, requires no external control power to operate its protection systems. It operates from current signal levels and control power derived through current sensors integrally mounted in the circuit breaker. The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is available in six different types. Each trip unit may be equipped with a maximum of five phase and two ground (time-current) adjustments to meet specific application requirements. The types of protection available for each model include the following, which are illustrated in-ures 2.1 through 2.6: Protection Long Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Short Time Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/ Ground Fig. 1 Circuit Breaker Assembly Cell Location Reference LED's light "'RED"' to indicate cause of trip Time-Current Curve for Phase Protection Time-Current Curve for Ground Protection View Settings in Window Types Ll* LS* LSI* LIG LSG LSIG Refer to Figure Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Model LSIG with Rating Plug I.L Note*: RMS Digitrip Type Ll, LS, and LSI trip units can be applied on 3-pole or 4-pole circuit breakers for protection of the neutral circuit, IF the circuit breaker is wired and MA RKED for NEUTRA L PROTECTION. Refer to the National Electric Code for appropriate application of 4-pole breakers. 1.2 Information Light Emitting Diodes (LED's) on the face of the trip unit light "Red" to indicate the reason for an automatic trip operation. The battery in the rating plug maintains the reason for trip indication following an automatic trip operation, until the ''TRIP RESET" button is pushed. The "Green" LED in the lower right corner "blinks" to indicate the trip unit is operating normally. The battery in the rating plug is "OK" if the LED lights "Green" when the "battery check" button next to it is pushed. (See Section 6.). Note: The Digitrip RMS 510 provides all of its protection functions regardless of the status of the battery. The battery serves only to maintain the indication of the reason for automatic trip. Adjust Protection Settings for Desired values with Rotary Switches Trip Unit Operational Status "Blinking Green"=OK

23 I.L Fig Long Time/Instantaneous Protection (L I) Fig. 2.2 Long Time/Short Time Protection (LS) Fig. 2.3 Fig. 2.4 Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Protection (LSI) Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LIG) Page 3

24 Page 4 Fig Testing Long Time/Short Time/Ground/Protection (LSG) To test the trip unit, use the integral test panel. (See Section 5.0.) 2.0 UL LISTED DEVICES Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Units are "Listed" by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Under UL File E7819, for use in types DS, DSL, SPB and Series C A-Frame circuit breakers. 3.0 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 3.1 General The Digitrip RMS 510 trip unit is designed for use in industrial circuit breaker environments where the ambient temperatures can range from -20 C to +85 C and rarely exceed 70 to 75 C. If, however, temperatures in the neighborhood of the trip unit do exceed this range, the trip unit performance may be degraded. In order to insure that the tripping function is not compromised due to an over-temperature condition, the Digitrip RMS 510 microcomputer chip has a built-in over-temperature protection feature, factory set to trip the breaker if the chip temperature exceeds 95 C. If over-temperature is the reason for the trip, the Long Delay Time LED will light "RED". Fig. 2.6 I.L Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LSIG) The Digitrip RMS 51 0 Trip unit provides three basic functions: Protection, Information and Testing. A typical trip unit and rating plug are illustrated in Fig. 1. Individual product instruction leaflets referenced in Section 9.0 illustrate typical Digitrip RMS Trip Units installed in specific breakers. The trip unit employs the Cutler-Hammer Inc. custom designed integrated circuit S11RE + chip, which includes a microcomputer to perform its numeric and logic functions. The principle of operation is described by the block diagram shown in Fig. 3. In the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, all required sensing and tripping power to operate its protection function is derived from the current sensors in the circuit breaker. The secondary currents from these sensors provide the correct input information for the protection functions, as well as tripping power, whenever the circuit breaker is carrying current. These current signals develop analog voltages across the appropriate calibrating resistors including: 1) Phase currents 2) Ground current (when supplied) 3) Rating plug The resulting analog voltages are digitized by the custom designed integrated circuits.

25 I.L Page 5 Fig. 3, I I I 1' 1' 1'.. ) ) J. : J Typocai Phase Or rourd Cal br ho" e.. st<v Digitrip RMS 510 Block Diagram with Breaker Interface The microcomputer, in cyclic fashion, repeatedly scans the voltage values across each calibrating resistor and enters these values into its Random Access Memory (RAM). These data are used to calculate true RMS current values, which are then repeatedly compared with the protection function settings and other operating data stored in the Read Only Memory (ROM). The software program then determines whether to initiate protection functions, including tripping the breaker through the low energy trip device (Flux Transfer Shunt Trip or Direct Trip Actuator) in the circuit breaker. 3.2 Trip and Operation Indicators The LEOs, shown in Figs. 1 and , on the face of the trip unit, light "RED" to indicate the reason for any automatic trip operation. As indicated in Figs , each LED is strategically located in the related segment of the time-current curve depicted on the face of the trip unit. The reason for trip is identified by the segment of the time-current curve where the LED is lighted "RED". Following an automatic trip operation, the back-up battery, continues to supply power to the LEOs as indicated in Figs. 3 and 6. To check the status of the battery, see Section 6. Push the 'Trip Reset" button shown in Fig. 1, to turn "Off" the LEOs following a trip operation. A green colored LED, as shown in Fig. 1, indicates the operational status of the trip unit. Once the load current through the circuit breaker exceeds approximately 10% of the frame/current sensor rating, the green LED will flash "On" and "Off" once each second, to indicate the trip unit is energized and operating properly. Note: If the LED is steadily "GREEN", i.e. not flashing, the trip unit is not ready. 11 Logtlled RE:l Indicates C use Of TRIP l o<:ated Or root Panel See Secuc>n 1 2 Int egrated Circuit 51-iRE+ TM Chip 3.3 Test Provisions (See Section 5.0) s ; : ' ;, FP c ;. ng SeeSectlon4 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) (For Types LS and LSG trip units only.) TnpU"ot Operatong St h" ln<lo.jtor (Flashing GREEN indocatesok> s.. e seouun 32 When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous protection setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, a making current release (or DIScriminator) circuit is provided. This circuit will prevent the circuit breaker from being closed and latched-in on a faulted circuit. The non-adjustable release is pre-set at eleven (1 1) times the installed rating plug current (In). The making current release is enabled only tor the first ten (1 0) cycles following an initial circuit breaker closing operation, provided the load current exceeds approximately 10% of the circuit breaker frame (or current sensor) rating. Should the load current through the circuit breaker drop to less than the 10% value, the release will reset. The release, once reset, will remain enabled until the load current passing through the circuit breaker has exceeded the 10% value for 10 cycles. The making current release will trip the circuit breaker instantaneously. In the event the breaker is intended to close (but not to trip out again) into a circuit whose current could initially be higher than 11 x In, it is possible to make the DIScriminator inactive. If the breaker does close onto a fully rated fault current, when the DIScriminator is inactive, the breaker will wait tor the full short-time delay setting before it trips. The DIScriminator (making current release) can be made inactive by turning the "OVERRIDE/'' setting switch (nearest the bottom edge of the trip unit) from the "DIS" position, to the "[BLANK]" position. (See Figs. 2.2 and 2.5.)

26 Page 6 Notes: 1 This switch has eight (8) positions, and seven (7) of them show "DIS" in the window, while ONLY ONE position shows "[BLANK]". 2 When the "OVERRIDE/" window shows "[BLANK]", the only fast-acting high short-circuit protection available is the OVERRIDE [Fixed Instantaneous]. (See 3.5 below.) 3.5 OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) (For Types LS And LSG Trip Units Only) When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, the Fixed Instantaneous "Override" analog trip circuit is automatically pre-set to a value no greater than the short-time withstand current rating of the circuit breaker in which the trip unit is installed. Since the specific values vary tor different circuit breaker types and ratings, refer to time-current curves, listed in Section 9, tor the values applicable to your breaker. It breaker trips due to high instantaneous current, the "OVERRIDE" LED will light "RED". 3.6 Zone Interlocking Zone Selective Interlocking (or Zone Interlocking) is available (see Fig. 3) tor Digitrip RMS Trip Units having Short Delay and/or Ground Fault protection. Zone Selective Interlocking provides the fastest possible tripping tor faults within the breaker's zone of protection, and yet also provides positive coordination among all breakers in the system (mains, ties, feeders and downstream breakers) to limit the outage to the affected part of the system only. When Zone Interlocking is enabled, a fault within the breaker's zone of protection will cause the RMS DIG ITRIP trip unit to: a) Trip the affected breaker instantaneously, and at the same time b) Send a signal to upstream RMS DIGITRIP trip units to restrain from tripping immediately. The restraining signal causes the upstream breakers to follow their set coordination times, so that only the minimum service is disrupted, while the fault is cleared in the shortest time possible. (This signal requires only a single pair of wires from the output terminals of the downstream breaker's trip unit to the input terminals of the upstream breaker's trip unit. For specific instructions see the applicable connection diagrams tor your breaker listed in Section 9.0.) I.L Note: If a breaker (M) receives a Zone Interlocking signal from another breaker (F), but the fault current level is less than the trip unit setting for breaker (M), the signal from the other breaker (F) will not cause breaker (M) to trip. A CAUTION IF ZONE INTERLOCKING IS NOT TO BE USED (I.E. STANDARD TIME-DELAY COORDINATION ONLY IS INTENDED), THE ZONE INTERLOCKING TERMINALS MUST BE CONNECTED WITH JUMPER WIRES, AS SPECIFIED ON THE CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR YOUR BREAKER (S EE SECTION 9.0), SO THE TIME DELAY SETTINGS WILL PROVIDE THE INTENDED COORDINATION. For an example of how Zone Selective Interlocking may be used, See Appendix A. 4.0 PROTECTION SETTINGS 4.1 General Prior to placing circuit breaker in operation, each trip unit protection setting must be set to the values specified by the engineer responsible tor the installation. The number of settings that must be made is determined by the protector model supplied as illustrated in Figs. 2.1 through 2.6. Each setting is made with a rotary switch, using a small screwdriver. The selected setting tor each adjustment appears in its respective rectangular viewing window as illustrated in Fig. 1. The installed rating plug establishes the maximum continuous current rating of the circuit breaker (In)- Instantaneous and ground current settings are defined in multiples of (In). To illustrate the effect of each protection curve setting, simulated Time-Current curves are pictured on the face of the trip unit. The rotary switch to make each setting is located nearest that portion of the simulated Time-Current curve it controls. Should an automatic "trip" occur (as a result of the current exceeding the pre-selected value), the LED in the appropriate segment of the simulated Time-Current curve will light "RED" indicating the reason tor "trip". The available settings, along with the illustrated effect of changing the settings, are given in Figs. 4.1 through 4. 7.

27 I.L Long Delay Current Setting There are eight (8) available Long Delay Settings, as illustrated in Fig Each setting, called "/;' is expressed as a multiple (ranging from.5 to 1) of the rating plug current (In). Note: "1," is also the basis for the Short-Delay Current Setting. (See Section 4.4.) Fig Long Delay Setting l r OJx In 0 l r Long Delay Current Settings 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting l r Available Settings.5. 6,.7,.8..85,.9. 95, 1 In Multiples of Rating Plug Amperes Onl There are eight (8) available Long Delay Time Settings, as illustrated in Fig. 4.2, ranging from 2 to 24 seconds. These settings are the total clearing times when the current value equals six (6) times 1,. Fig. 4.2 Notes: 6xl, Long Delay Time Settings Available Settings , , 15, 20, 24 Seconds at 6 Times Long Delay Setting O r l 1) In addition to the standard Long Delay Protection Element, the Digitrip RMS 51 0 trip unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. If a breaker is reclosed soon after a Long Delay Trip, and the current again exceeds the Long Delay Setting, 1, the LTM automatically reduces the time to trip, to Page 7 allow for the fact that the load circuit temperature is already higher than normal, due to the prior overload condition. Each time an overload condition is repeated, the LTM causes the breaker to trip in a time progressively earlier than the "Long Delay Time Setting". When the load current returns to normal, the LTM begins to reset; and after about 10 minutes it has reset fully, so that next Long Delay trip time will again be the "Setting" value. In certain applications it may be desirable to disable the LTM function. The LTM function can be disabled by (first opening the breaker and then) removing the Rating Plug (See Figures 1 and 6), and lastly moving the LTM jumper (inside the rating plug cavity, See figure 4.2.1) to its "INAC TIVE" connection. (You can enable the LTM function again any time you wish by moving the LTM jumper back to its original "ACTIVE" connection.),- Rating Plug Cavity {.../} Standard from Factory "L TM Active" --- Rating Plug Cavity "-----}--- 1-L "L TM Inactive" -- Fig Long Time Memory "LTM" Jumper The action of the LTM is a factor to consider in performing multiple Long Delay Time tests. (See Section 5.4.) 2) There is a condition under which the Long Delay Trip LED can erroneously indicate a LOT has occurred, even though the breaker is still closed. This can happen when an overload current momentarily exceeds the Long Delay Current Setting, 1, so that the Long Delay LED flashes "RED" to indicate the overload condition. Then if, at the very moment when the LED is "ON", the load current would then suddenly drop to a value less than 10% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating, the trip unit stops functioning while the "4bit Latch Chip" (See Fig. 3) is set and the LED remains Lighted. If the current would again increase to a value above the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, and then return to normal, the

28 ..., Page S LOT will reset itself. You can of course, manually clear the LOT (or any other trip indication) at any time, by pushing the "PUS H to RESET" button. (See Figure 1.) 4.4 Short Delay Current Setting There are eight (8) available Short Delay Current Settings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times 1, and the other two settings are "S1" or "S2" times 1,. (REMEMBER: l, is the Long Delay Current Setting). The values that "S1" and "S2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section Short Delay Time Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.4, there are two different Short Delay curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2 t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2 t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the short delay current range than will the flat response. n (-:>-... Fig. 4.3 {"" ::.. Available Settings _. Short Delay, j'=.. Setting r, 5, _'-,. 6, S,, r' "' S2... -, [j]' I, 11 ',r In Multiples of 1 1 \ : -L (1, J :\ :. ::.....: 3 } 51 and 52 Values are Specified on Rating Plug Short Delay Current Settings Long Delay Setting Five flat (.1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2 t (.1*,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2 t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the viewing window. The 1 2 t response is applicable to currents less than eight (8) times 1,, the Long Delay Setting. For currents greater than 8 times 1,, the 1 2 t response reverts to the flat response. Note: See also Section 3.6, Zone Interlocking, above. 4.6 Instantaneous Current Setting There are eight (8) available Instantaneous Current Settings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times (In) the rating plug value, and the I.L other two settings are "M1" or "M2" times (In). The values that "M1" and "M2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section NO Instantaneous Current Setting For types LS and LSG trip units, please see Sections 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) and 3.5 OVER RIDE (Fixed Instantaneous), for available fast-acting high short-circuit protection. 4.8 Ground Fault Current Setting The eight (8) Ground Fault Current Settings are labeled with the code letters "A" through "K" (except there are no "G" or "I" settings), as illustrated in Fig In general, the specific current settings range from 0.25 to 1.0 times (In). the rating plug value, but cannot exceed 1200 A. The specific Ground Current Settings for each letter are listed in Table 1 and on the applicable Time-Current curve for the breaker. Fig. 4.4 p Sho ' Delay Time 8J Sec. 0 Cbu I""'\ l, -} I I : L_-::..- ] "" I I fj ( '.. I,-JQI t,.'-, "'-J 1 M -, ' I I I '- ',._ w "..:::-3 "*"In Viewing Window r'f Indicates 1 1 Ft Shape I...J 8 x lr Short Delay Time Settings.1,.2,.3,..5 Seconds WI h Flat Respon, e J2t Shape Returns to Flat Response at Cu rre 1ts Higher than 8 x 1,.t,.J,.5* Seconds with J2t Shape

29 I.L r-' r-, 1..,... 1 I"'- Available Settings,,, I I II, : I I m"" , I , M1, M, Setting lnst. I L In Multiples of : -- Rating Plug Amperes ll n l (S) I_ --- Fig. 4.5 M1 and M2 Values are Specified on Rating Plug Instantaneous Current Settings Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Setting Fig. 4.6 Gnd-Fault [J x l n e Available Sett'mgs A, 8, C, D, E. F. H, K Ground Fa ult Current Settings Specific Values Given on Circuit Breaker Time-Current Curve and in Table 1 TABLE 1 -GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETIINGS (AMPERES)(]) A 8 c D E F H K Page c w a: w ::;;;: $ BOO (!) ::::> J (!) z a: w..j J ;:: en 3000/ BOO G) Tolerances on settings are ±1 0% of values Refer to Type OS, type SPB or Series C A-Frame supplemental instruction leaflets given in Section 9 for list of available rating plugs for each type circuit breaker. 4.9 Ground Fault Time Delay Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.7, there are two different Ground Fault curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2 t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2 t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the ground fault current range than will the flat response. Five flat (.1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2 t (.1*,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2 t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the setting viewing window. The 1 2 t response is applicable to currents less than times the ampere rating of the installed rating plug (In). For currents greater than x In the 1 2 t response reverts to the flat response

30 Page 10 Fig \ \ \ \\ Gnd Fault \, Time { I I I I 1 : I] Ava ilable Settings : \ ,.4,.5 Seconds with ( I 1 l I Flat Response I \... _ :_-- I :: I I 1 / --1] Returns to Flat I I! ' _ l I :'......,.. f I 12t Shape Response at Approximately 1n.1*,.3*,.5* -.. ' Seconds with ' " "In Viewing Window ' ' " I 12t Shape Indicates '.._ - - -,.. 12t Shape ' Ground Fa ult Time Delay Settings Note: See also Section 3.6 on Zone Interlocking. 5.0 TEST PROCEDURES 5.1 General A DANGER DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL, TEST OR PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENER GIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. DE-ENERGIZE THE CIRCUIT AND DISCONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTE NANCE OR TESTS. As illustrated in Figs. 1 and 5, an integral test panel is provided to test the Digitrip RMS 51 0 Trip Unit. Several no-trip settings are provided to check the trip unit operation without actually tripping the circuit breaker.,. - - Fig. 5 Breaker Trips At 6T and GFT Test Amps (ill CD x In z Test 0 Reset 0 Unit 0 Status I.L Available "Test Amps" Settings CD "6T" =Phase Current Test at 6xln and TRIPS breaker; "1, 2, 3, B or 10" xi =Phase Current Test NO 'breaker TRIP; "GFT" =Ground Current Test and TRIPS breaker; "GF" =Ground Current Test NO breaker TRIP. See Section for inser vice test trip Push, then release Trip Reset button to reset Trip Unit. Required following all automatic trip and test operations. Push, then release Test button to test. Test operation begins with release of pushbutton. Integral Test Panel (Lower Right Corner of Trip Unit) A CAUTION TESTING A CIRCUIT BREAKER UNDER "TRIP CON DITIONS" WHILE IT IS IN SERVICE AND CARRYING LOAD CURRENT, WHETHER DONE BY INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL MEANS, IS NOT RECOMMENDED. ANY TRIPPING OPERATION WILL CAUSE DISRUP TION OF SERVICE AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM UNNECESSARY SWITCH ING OF CONNECTED EQUIPMENT. TESTING OF A CIRCUIT BREAKER THAT RESULTS IN THE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE DONE ONLY WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN THE "TEST" OR "DISCONNECTED" CELL POSITIONS OR WHILE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS ON A TEST BENCH. To preserve the primary protection function of the trip unit, all in-service testing under "Trip" or "No-Trip" conditions are only perfo rmed at load current values no greater than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting, lr- Any attempt to conduct in-service testing when the load current exceeds 50% of 1,, will not be executed by the trip unit. Since the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is completely selfpowered using energy derived from the current sensors installed in the circuit breaker, all in-service tests conducted should be conducted with the auxiliary control power module, shown in Fig. 7, plugged into the trip unit. This action will avoid difficulties caused by load current levels that are too low to operate the trip unit.

31 I.L When To Test Tests can be conducted with the breaker in the "connected" cell position while carrying load current. However, as stated in the caution note in Section 5.1, good practice will limit circuit breaker in-service "trip tests", where required, to maintenance periods during times of minimum load conditions. Testing, prior to start-up can best be accomplished with the breaker out of its cell or in the 'Test", "Disconnected" or "Withdrawn" (or Removed) cell positions. Note: Since time-current settings are based on desired system coordination and protection schemes, the protection settings selected and preset in accordance with Section 4.0 above should not be altered during or as a part of any routine test sequence. 5.3 Test Provision As indicated in Fig. 5, six different 'Test Amps" settings (1, 2, 3, 6T, 8 and 1 OX In) are available for testing the phase elements of the trip unit, and two (GF, GFT) are provided for testing the ground elements. A CAUTION A SETTING OF EITHER 6T OR GFT WILL TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. (S EE SECTION BELOW.) For any combination of the phase protection settings, an appropriate "No Trip" condition can be set to test the long time, short time and instantaneous trip settings without tripping the circuit breaker. In the "GF" test position, the level of test current based on In, is adequate to demonstrate the operating condition of the trip unit without tripping the circuit breaker. This is a functional check only, not a calibration. 5.4 Conducting Tests 1 ) Before starting any test sequence, check the Unit Status (Green LED) in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) to be sure it is blinking on and off about once each second, which indicates that the trip unit is functioning normally In the event the Unit Status LED is not blinking, install an Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7), or if you have one already, check to see that it is connected correctly. 2) If the circuit breaker is carrying current, check for the following conditions: Page 1 1 a) the current is not less than 1 0% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating; be sure the "GREEN" Unit Status LED (in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) is blinking on and off (indicating that there is enough current flowing to provide the power necessary to operate the trip unit). In the event the Unit Status LED is either lighted "GREEN" or "OFF" continuously, there is NOT enough current flowing to power the trip unit; and an APM (See Fig. 7) should be installed before proceeding with the test. and b) the current is not more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting (1,) ; because the trip unit will not execute your test instructions when it senses that the current through the breaker exceeds the 50% level. 3) When performing tests on the Long Delay element, be aware that in addition to the standard protection element, the Oigitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects 07 repeated overload conditions. (See NOTE 1 under Section 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting.) The action of the LTM will have the same effect of advancing the Long Delay Trip Time if multiple Long Delay Time tests are performed repeatedly - as one might do in making single phase tests on each pole of a breaker in succession, for example. If you have sufficient experience in performing tests with this kind of accelerated trip timing, you may be comfortable with the results of tests performed in quick succession. However, if there is any question, you may simply wait about ten (10) minutes after a Long Delay Trip for the LTM to reset, before you check the next pole Control Power For testing the trip unit, an optional Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) as shown in Fig. 7 is recommended. This Auxiliary Power Module, which operates from a separate 120 Vac supply, may be used when a drawout circuit breaker is in any of its four cell positions, i.e., "Connected", 'Test", "Disconnected" and "Withdrawn" (or "Removed.") Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without

32 Page 12 the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well-above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Plug in the Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) to insure control power is available for testing. When the APM is properly connected the "GREEN" Unit Status LED will blink on and off about once per second Not Tripping the Breaker 1. Place the ''Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the six "No Trip" test settings, i.e., 1, 2, 3, 8, or 10, x In, or GF Depress the (Black) ''Test" pushbutton and release it - the test starts when the pushbutton is released. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected "No Trip" test value, then the LED related to that function will turn on signifying successful completion of the test action. Note: During the long delay tests the Long Delay LED flashes "RED". 4. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the ''Trip Reset" pushbutton. All LEOs lighted by the "No Trip" test action should turn "OFF". Should an actual overload or fault condition occur during an in-service, "No Trip Test" sequence, the protection function will override the test function, and the circuit breaker will trip automatically in accordance with the actual Time-Current settings. Note: The "Trip Reset" pushbutton may be depressed at any time. However, should a test already be in progress, the test would be aborted. A test initiated via the integral test panel may be aborted at any time by depressing the ''Trip Reset" pushbutton Tripping the Breaker 1. Make sure that the circuit breaker is carrying no current. (See CAUTION notes under Section 5.1.) NOTE: In the event it is decided to perform a "Breaker Trip Test" while load current is flowing, make sure the circuit breaker is carrying no more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting 1,. (The I.L trip unit will not execute your instructions to Test itself, when the load current exceeds 50% of lr) 2. Place the ''Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the two ''Trip" test settings, i.e., 6T or GFT. 3. Depress the black ''Test" pushbutton (See Fig. 5) and release it - the test is initiated when the pushbutton is released. 4. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected ''Test Amps" value, the circuit breaker will trip and the LED related to that function will light "RED". 5. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the ''Trip Reset" pushbutton (See Fig. 5). All LEOs lighted by the ''Trip" test action should turn "OFF". 6.0 BATTERY (INSIDE THE RATING PLUG) 6.1 General The battery has no part in the protection function of the trip unit. As indicated in Figs. 3 and 6, the battery is provided to maintain the "RED" LED indication of the cause of TRIP in the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. The battery is located in the rating plug along with a battery check pushbutton and a green battery check LED. 6.2 Battery Check The battery is a long life, lithium photo type unit. The status of the battery can be checked at any time by depressing the battery check pushbutton and observing the "GREEN" LED as shown in Fig. 6. If the battery check LED does not light "GREEN", replace the battery. The condition of the battery has no effect on the protection function of the trip unit. Even with the battery removed, the unit will still trip the breaker in accordance with its settings. However, without the battery, the cause of TRIP LED will not be lighted "RED". If the battery is replaced (or if an Auxiliary Power Module is plugged into the trip unit), one or more of the cause of Trip LED's may be illuminated. The user should push the red "TRIP RESET" button to turn off the indications, and the trip unit will be ready to indicate the next cause of trip. 6.3 Battery Replacement The battery can be easily replaced from the front of the trip unit by lowering the hinged cover of the rating plug as shown in Fig. 6. The battery can then be removed by pulling the battery tab as shown in Fig. 6.

33 J.L Note: The battery can be replaced at any time, even while the circuit breaker is in service, without affecting the operation of the circuit breaker or its protection function. A CAUTION CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED WHEN REPLACING A BATTERY TO INSURE THAT THE CORRECT POLARITIES ARE OBSERVED. POLARITY MARK INGS ARE SHOWN ON THE RATING PLUG WHEN THE HINGED COVER IS OPEN AS INDICATED IN FIG. 6. The replacement battery should be the same type or equivalent. Acceptable 3.0 volt lithium batteries may be Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Rating Plug is for Type DS Circuit Breakers Only Ranng Plug Identification 'Batterv Check -- Pushbutton l Typical Rating Plug Values for Shorl Delay S1 and S2 Instantaneous M1 and M2 Settings Batten,; "OK" if LED Lights "'GREEN" when ''Battery Check" Bullen s Pushed Trip Unit Connector (Fits into Keyed Cavity in Top Right Corner of Trip Unit See Fig_ 1) -- t t PftTUPM 1 1C - st!. l:not :.tat;;w 4 A fly Un {l;q W tt 1na lltr,w!!his Auxiliary Power Module Page 13 obtained from the following companies under their type designation indicated: Company Varta Batteries, Inc. 150 Clarbrook Road Elmsford, N.Y Duracell South Broadway Ta rrytown, N.Y (914) Sanyo Electric Inc. Battery Division 200 Riser Road Little Ferry, N.J Polarity Marks Model CR 1/3N DL 1/3N CR 1/3N Battery Removal Tab Battery

34 Page AUXILIARY POWER MODULE The Auxiliary Power Module or APM (Cat No. PRTAAPM), illustrated in Fig. 7, is an encapsulated power supply that requires a 120 Vac input at either 50 or 60 Hz. It provides an output of 32 Vdc (nominal 40 Vdc open circuit) which can be used for testing a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. When a drawout circuit breaker is equipped with a Digitrip RMS 51 0 Trip Unit, it can be conveniently set and tested while the circuit breaker is out of its cell or in its cell in the ''Test", "Disconnect" or "Withdrawn" positions by using the Auxiliary Power Module. The Auxiliary Power Module is equipped with a unique plug-in connector suitable only for plugging into the keyed receptacle in the upper right corner of a Digitrip RMS Trip Unit as shown in Fig. 1. This prohibits the possible use of an incorrect type power module. 8.0 FRAME RATINGS, (WHERE APPLICABLE, SENSOR RATINGS) AND RATING PLUGS The Frame Rating of a circuit breaker is the maximum RMS current it can carry continuously. The maximum Short-Circuit Current Rating of the Circuit breaker are usually related to the Frame Rating as well. It is often times desirable to be able to choose a current value (In), less than the full frame rating, to be the basis for the coordination of the circuit breaker's protection functions, without affecting its short-circuit current capability. For the Digitrip 510 trip unit this is implemented by changing the Rating Plug (and/or Current Sensors, where applicable - See your circuit breaker instructions (listed in Section 9.0 below) to determine if this applies to your circuit breaker). The (Current) Sensor Rating (where applicable) is the maximum RMS current the circuit breaker can carry with the specified current sensors installed. The Sensor Rating can be the same or less than the Frame Rating, but not greater. The Rating Plug (See Fig. 6) fits into a special cavity to complete the trip unit (See Fig. 1 ). Rating plugs have two current ratings listed on their covers (See Fig. 6): 1) the "Must be used with Frame Rated" cur- I.L rent value (or "Sensor Rated", if applicable), " and 2) "In (Rated I) = current value. This latter value, (In) is the basis for the trip unit current settings: 1) The Instantaneous and Ground Current Settings (if provided) are multiples of (In) (See Sections 4.6 and 4.8) The Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, is a multiple of (In) Long Delay Current Setting = 1, = LD x (In) (See Section 4.2) 2) 3) The Short Delay Current Setting (if provided) is indirectly dependent upon (In), because it is a multiple of 1,, which in turn is a multiple of (In) Short Delay Current Setting = SD x 1, (See Section 4.4) = SD X LD X (In)- Rating Plugs for the Digit rip RMS 510 trip units are marked for and may be applied on both 50 and 60 Hz systems. A CAUTION BEFORE YOU FIT THE RA TING PLUG INTO THE TRIP UNIT, BE SURE TO CHECK THAT THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RA TING IF APPLICABLE), MA TCH THOSE PRINTED ON THE RA TING PLUG COVER. INSTALLING A RA TING PLUG THA T DOES NOT MA TCH THE BREA KER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RA TING, IF APPLICA BLE), CAN PRODUCE SERIOUS MISCOORDINA TION AND/OR FA ILURE OF THE PROTECTION SYSTEM. Complete catalog descriptions of all available rating plugs are given in the applicable circuit breaker supplementary instruction leaflets. (See Section 9) Note: Rating plugs from Digitrip models 500/SOOnOO/ 800 CAN NOT be used with model 510 trip units. The connection pins are located in different positions, so that one cannot accidentally use the incorrect kind of plug.

35 I.L REFERENCES 9.1 Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies I.L I.L I.L Instructions for Digitrip AMS 51 0 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip AMS 61 0 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip AMS 81 0 Trip Unit 9.2 Type OS Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers I.B I.B AD SC SC SC B508 Instructions for Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Types OS and DSL Supplement B to Digitrip AMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Types OS and DSL Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Connection Diagram for Ty pe OS Circuit Breakers 9.3 Type SPB Systems Pow-A Breakers I. L Instruction for the Systems Pow-A Breaker and Drawout Mechanism I.L AD SC SC SC I.S Supplementary Instructions for the Systems Pow-A Breaker used with the Digitrip AMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Type SPB Systems Pow-A Breaker Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) SPB Master Connection Diagram 9.4 Series c A-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers 29C C107 29C713 AD A SC SC SC Frame Book Frame Instruction Leaflet Supplementary Instructions for Series c A-Frame used with the Digitrip AMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for A-Frame Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Page 15 I.L. 29C714 Master Connection Diagram for Series c A-Frame Circuit Breaker APPENDIX A ZONE INTERLOCKING Assume a ground fault of 2000 Amperes occurs and refer to Fig A.1. CAS E 1: There is no Zone Selective Interlocking. (standard time delay coordination is used) Fault 3 The branch breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.1 s. Fault 2 The feeder breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.3 s. Fault 1 The breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.5 s. CAS E 2: There is Zone Selective Interlocking Fault 3 The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault and Z3 will send an interlocking signal to the Z2 trip unit; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to Z1. Z1 and Z2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the branch breaker Z3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker Z2 will clear the fault in 0.3 s (as above). Similarly, in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 2 The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to the Z1 trip unit. Z1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 1 There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s. Figure A.2 presents a Zone Selective Interlocking connection diagram for a system with two main breakers from incoming sources and a bus tie breaker. Note the blocking diode 01 is needed so that the feeder breakers can send interlocking signals to both the main and tie breakers, without having the tie breaker send itself an interlocking signal.

36 Page 16 Fig. A. 1 t "' 1 N t "' "' c: 0 2 N t Fig. A.2 "' c: 0 N A ) 1600 A ) I 200 A ) Main 0.5 Sec 1200 A Feeder 0.3 Sec 400 A Branch Z1 Z2 0.1 Sec Z3 100A Typical Zone Interlocking (Ground Fa ult Protection) M1 0.1 Sec 0.1 Sec I.L Notes: A1 : Wiring to be twisted pair of AWG No. 14 to AWG No. 20. Route Zone Interlocking wiring separate from power conductors. DO NOT GROUND any Zone Interlock Wiring. M2 0.5 Sec A2: The maximum distance between first and last zone is 250 feet (1 1 0 m). A3: A Maximum of 20 breakers may be connected in parallel in one Zone. F21 F22 F23 2 Legend =Common (Ungrounded) =Short Delay Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Short Delay Input Signal from Lower Level Zone =Ground Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Ground Input Signal from Lower Level Zone /cault at Location Sec 0.1 Sec 0.1 Sec Typical Zone Interlocking Connections with Two Main Breakers (M1, M2) and a Tie Breaker (T) (Short Delay Protection)

37 I.L Page 17 NOTES

38 Page 18 I.L NOTES

39 I.L Page 19 NOTES

40 Page 20 This instruction booklet is published solely for information purposes and should not be considered all inclusive. If further information is required, you should consult Cutler-Hammer. Sale of product shown in this literature is subject to terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Cutler-Hammer Inc. selling policies or other contractual agreement between the parties. This literature is not intended to and does not enlarge or add to any such contract. The sole source governing the rights and remedies of any purchaser of this equipment is the contract between the purchaser and Cutler-Hammer Inc. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY, OR WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, ARE MADE REGARDING THE INFORMATION, RECOMMENDAT IONS AND DESCRIPTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN. In no event will Cutler-Hammer Inc. be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damage or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment, plant or power system, cost of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities, or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the use of the information, recommendations and description contained herein. Cutler-Hammer Inc Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, U.S.A. Style No. 7829C35H03 Printed in U.S.A./CCI I.L

41 lto'oj Cutler-Hammer I.L Table of Contents Instructions for Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Page 1.0 General Description Protection Information Testing UL Listed Devices Principle of Operation General Trip and Operation Indicators Test Provisions DIScriminator (Making Current Release) OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) Zone Interlocking Protection Settings General Long Delay Current Settings Long Delay Time Settings Short Delay Current Settings Short Delay Time Settings Instantaneous Current Settings NO Instantaneous Current Settings Ground Fault Current Settings Ground Fault Time Delay Settings Test Procedure General When To Test Test Provision Conducting Tests Control Power Not Tripping the Breaker Tripping the Breaker Battery (Inside the Rating Plug) General Battery Check Battery Replacement Auxiliary Power Module Frame Ratings, (where applicable, Sensor Ratings) and Rating Plugs References Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies Type DS Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers Series C% A-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Appendix A Zone Interlocking - Example... 15, Supersedes I.L. 29-BB5A dated September 1994 A WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL OR PERFORM MAIN TENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENERGIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT NO VOLTAGE IS PRESENT BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE TASK, AND ALWAYS FOLLOW GENERALLY ACCEPTED SAFETY PROCEDURES. CUTLER-HAMMER IS NOT LIABLE FOR THE MISAPPLICATION OR MISINSTAL LATION OF ITS PRODUCTS. It is strongly urged that the user observe all recommendations, warnings and cautions relating to the safety of personnel and equipment, as well as general and local health and safety laws, codes, and procedures. The recommendations and information contained herein are based on experience and judgment, but should not be considered to be all-inclusive or covering every application or circumstance which may arise. If you have any questions or need further information or instructions, please contact your local representative, or the Customer Support Center for the type of circuit breaker you have: Circuit Call Send to Breaker Telephone FAX Type Number Number DS/DSL (412) (41 2) SPB (41 2) (41 2) Series c A-Frame (41 2) (41 2) GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.1 Protection The Digitrip RMS 510, illustrated in Fig. 1, is a custom application specific integrated circuit based trip unit suitable for use in types DS and DSL low voltage AC power circuit breakers and type SPB Systems Pow-R circuit breakers and Series c A-Frame molded case circuit breakers. The Digitrip RMS 510 provides true RMS current sensing for proper correlation with thermal characteristics of conductors and equipment. Interchangeable rating plugs are provided to establish the continuous current rating of each circuit breaker.

42 Page 2 The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is completely self-contained and when the circuit breaker is closed, requires no external control power to operate its protection systems. It operates from current signal levels and control power derived through current sensors integrally mounted in the circuit breaker. The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is available in six different types. Each trip unit may be equipped with a maximum of five phase and two ground (time-current) adjustments to meet specific application requirements. The types of protection available for each model include the following, which are illustrated in Figures 2.1 through 2.6: Protection Long Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Short Time Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/ Ground Fig. 1 Circuit Breaker Assembly Cell LED's light ''RED" to indicate cause of trip Tome-Current Curve for Ground Protection Types Ll* LS* LSI* LIG LSG LSIG Refer to Figure Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Model LSIG with Rating Plug I.L Note*: RMS Digitrip Type Ll, LS, and LSI trip units can be applied on 3-pole or 4-pole circuit breakers for protection of the neutral circuit, IF the circuit breaker is wired and MARKED for NEUTRAL PROTECTION. Refer to the National Electric Code for appropriate application of 4-pole breakers. 1.2 Information Light Emitting Diodes (LED's) on the face of the trip unit light "Red" to indicate the reason for an automatic trip operation. The battery in the rating plug maintains the reason for trip indication following an automatic trip operation, until the 'TRIP RESET' button is pushed. The "Green" LED in the lower right corner "blinks" to indicate the trip unit is operating normally. The battery in the rating plug is "OK" if the LED lights "Green" when the "battery check" button next to it is pushed. (See Section 6.). Note: The Digitrip RMS 510 provides all of its protection functions regardless of the status of the battery. The battery serves only to maintain the indication of the reason for automatic trip. Adjust Protection Settings for Desired Values with Rotary Switches, Trip Unit - Operational Status "Blinking Green"=OK. erati t, _ "'"' _ ' _ g c. ' ' - - ' ' '{ i!,'. g "ii

43 I.L Fig Fig. 2.2 Long Time/Instantaneous Protection (LI) Long Time/Short Time Protection (LS) Fig. 2.3 Fig. 2.4 Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Protection (LSI) Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LIG) Page 3

44 Page 4 Fig Testing Long Time/Short Time/Ground/Protection (LSG) To test the trip unit, use the integral test panel. (See Section 5.0.) 2.0 UL LISTED DEVICES Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Units are "Listed" by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Under UL File E7819, for use in types DS, DSL, SPB and Series C R-Frame circuit breakers. 3.0 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 3.1 General The Digitrip RMS 510 trip unit is designed for use in industrial circuit breaker environments where the ambient temperatures can range from -20 C to +85 C and rarely exceed 70 to 75 C. If, however, temperatures in the neighborhood of the trip unit do exceed this range, the trip unit performance may be degraded. In order to insure that the tripping function is not compromised due to an over-temperature condition, the Digitrip RMS 510 microcomputer chip has a built-in over-temperature protection feature, factory set to trip the breaker if the chip temperature exceeds 95 C. If over-temperature is the reason for the trip, the Long Delay Time LED will light "RED". Fig. 2.6 I.L Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LSIG) The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip unit provides three basic functions: Protection, Information and Testing. A typical trip unit and rating plug are illustrated in Fig. 1. Individual product instruction leaflets referenced in Section 9.0 illustrate typical Digitrip RMS Trip Units installed in specific breakers. The trip unit employs the Cutler-Hammer Inc. custom designed integrated circuit S).l.RE +chip, which includes a microcomputer to perform its numeric and logic functions. The principle of operation is described by the block diagram shown in Fig. 3. In the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, all required sensing and tripping power to operate its protection function is derived from the current sensors in the circuit breaker. The secondary currents from these sensors provide the correct input information for the protection functions, as well as tripping power, whenever the circuit breaker is carrying current. These current signals develop analog voltages across the appropriate calibrating resistors including: 1) Phase currents 2) Ground current (when supplied) 3) Rating plug The resulting analog voltages are digitized by the custom designed integrated circuits.

45 I.L Fig. 3,, I I I " { load, LOWE A I Digitrip RMS 510 Block Diagram with Breaker Interface Integrated Circuit S)lRE+ TM Chip The microcomputer, in cyclic fashion, repeatedly scans 3.3 Test Provisions (See Section 5.0) the voltage values across each calibrating resistor and enters these values into its Random Access Memory 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) (RAM). These data are used to calculate true RMS current values, which are then repeatedly compared with the (For Types LS and LSG trip units only.) When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with protection function settings and other operating data an adjustable instantaneous protection setting, i.e., types stored in the Read Only Memory (ROM). The software LS or LSG, a making current release (or DIScriminator) program then determines whether to initiate protection circuit is provided. This circuit will prevent the circuit functions, including tripping the breaker through the low breaker from being closed and latched-in on a faulted circuit. The non-adjustable release is pre-set at eleven (1 1) energy trip device (Flux Transfer Shunt Trip or Direct Trip Actuator) in the circuit breaker. times the installed rating plug current (In)- 3.2 Trip and Operation Indicators The LEDs, shown in Figs. 1 and , on the face of the trip unit, light "RED" to indicate the reason for any automatic trip operation. As indicated in Figs , each LED is strategically located in the related segment of the time-current curve depicted on the face of the trip unit. The reason for trip is identified by the segment of the time-current curve where the LED is lighted "RED". Following an automatic trip operation, the back-up battery, continues to supply power to the LEDs as indicated in Figs. 3 and 6. To check the status of the battery, see Section 6. Push the ''Trip Reset" button shown in Fig. 1, to turn "Off" the LEDs following a trip operation. A green colored LED, as shown in Fig. 1, indicates the operational status of the trip unit. Once the load current through the circuit breaker exceeds approximately 10% of the frame/current sensor rating, the green LED will flash "On" and "Off" once each second, to indicate the trip unit is energized and operating properly. Note: If the LED is steadily "GREEN", i.e. not flashing, the trip unit is not ready. Page 5 The making current release is enabled only for the first ten (10) cycles following an initial circuit breaker closing operation, provided the load current exceeds approximately 10% of the circuit breaker frame (or current sensor) rating. Should the load current through the circuit breaker drop to less than the 10% value, the release will reset. The release, once reset, will remain enabled until the load current passing through the circuit breaker has exceeded the 10% value for 10 cycles. The making current release will trip the circuit breaker instantaneously. In the event the breaker is intended to close (but not to trip out again) into a circuit whose current could initially be higher than 11 x In, it is possible to make the DIScriminator inactive. If the breaker does close onto a fully rated fault current, when the DIScriminator is inactive, the breaker will wait for the full short-time delay setting before it trips. The DIScriminator (making current release) can be made inactive by turning the "OVERRIDE/" setting switch (nearest the bottom edge of the trip unit) from the "DIS" position, to the "[BLANK]" position. (See Figs. 2.2 and 2.5.)

46 Page 6 Notes: 1 This switch has eight (8) positions, and seven (7) of them show "DIS' in the window, while ONLY ONE position shows "[BLANK]". 2 When the "OVERRIDE/'' window shows "[BLANK]", the only fast-acting high short-circuit protection available is the OVERRIDE [Fixed Instantaneous]. (See 3.5 below.) 3.5 OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) (For Types LS And LSG Trip Units Only) When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, the Fixed Instantaneous "Override" analog trip circuit is automatically pre-set to a value no greater than the short-time withstand current rating of the circuit breaker in which the trip unit is installed. Since the specific values vary for different circuit breaker types and ratings, refer to time-current curves, listed in Section 9, for the values applicable to your breaker. If breaker trips due to high instantaneous current, the "OVERRIDE" LED will light "RED". 3.6 Zone Interlocking Zone Selective Interlocking (or Zone Interlocking) is available (see Fig. 3) for Digitrip RMS Trip Units having Short Delay and/or Ground Fault protection. Zone Selective Interlocking provides the fastest possible tripping for faults within the breaker's zone of protection, and yet also provides positive coordination among all breakers in the system (mains, ties, feeders and downstream breakers) to limit the outage to the affected part of the system only. When Zone Interlocking is enabled, a fault within the breaker's zone of protection will cause the RMS DIG ITRIP trip unit to: a) Trip the affected breaker instantaneously, and at the same time b) Send a signal to upstream RMS DIGITRIP trip units to restrain from tripping immediately. The restraining signal causes the upstream breakers to follow their set coordination times, so that only the minimum service is disrupted, while the fault is cleared in the shortest time possible. (This signal requires only a single pair of wires from the output terminals of the downstream breaker's trip unit to the input terminals of the upstream breaker's trip unit. For specific instructions see the applicable connection diagrams for your breaker listed in Section 9.0.) I.L Note: If a breaker (M) receives a Zone Interlocking signal from another breaker (F), but the fault current level is less than the trip unit setting for breaker (M), the signal from the other breaker (F) will not cause breaker (M) to trip. A CAUTION IF ZONE INTERLOCKING IS NOT TO BE USED (I.E. STANDARD TIME-DELAY COORDINATION ONLY IS INTENDED), THE ZONE INTERLOCKING TERMINALS MUST BE CONNECTED WITH JUMPER WIRES, AS SPECIFIED ON THE CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR YOUR BREAKER (SEE SECTION 9.0), SO THE TIME DELAY SETTINGS WILL PROVIDE THE INTENDED COORDINATION. For an example of how Zone Selective Interlocking may be used, See Appendix A. 4.0 PROTECTION SETTINGS 4.1 General Prior to placing circuit breaker in operation, each trip unit protection setting must be set to the values specified by the engineer responsible for the installation. The number of settings that must be made is determined by the protector model supplied as illustrated in Figs. 2.1 through 2.6. Each setting is made with a rotary switch, using a small screwdriver. The selected setting for each adjustment appears in its respective rectangular viewing window as illustrated in Fig. 1. The installed rating plug establishes the maximum continuous current rating of the circuit breaker (In) Instantaneous and ground current settings are defined in multiples of (In) To illustrate the effect of each protection curve setting, simulated Time-Current curves are pictured on the face of the trip unit. The rotary switch to make each setting is located nearest that portion of the simulated Time-Current curve it controls. Should an automatic "trip" occur (as a result of the current exceeding the pre-selected value), the LED in the appropriate segment of the simulated Time-Current curve will light "RED" indicating the reason for "trip". The available settings, along with the illustrated effect of changing the settings, are given in Figs. 4.1 through 4.7.

47 I.L Long Delay Current Setting There are eight (8) available Long Delay Settings, as illustrated in Fig Each setting, called "t;' is expressed as a multiple (ranging from.5 to 1) of the rating plug current (In) Note: "1," is also the basis for the Short-Delay Current Setting. (See Section 4.4.) Fig Long Delay Setting 1, OJx I n = 1, 0 Long Delay Current Settings 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting,, Available Settings.5,.6,.7,.8,.85,.9,.95, 1 In Multiples of Rating Plug Amperes tl n l There are eight (8) available Long Delay Time Settings, as illustrated in Fig. 4.2, ranging from 2 to 24 seconds. These settings are the total clearing times when the current value equals six (6) times 1,. Fig. 4.2 Notes: 6xl, Long Delay Time Settings Available Settings 2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, Seconds at 6 Times Long Delay Setting (I,J 1) In addition to the standard Long Delay Protection Element, the Digitrip RMS 510 trip unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. If a breaker is reclosed soon after a Long Delay Trip, and the current again exceeds the Long Delay Setting, 1, the LTM automatically reduces the time to trip, to Page 7 allow for the fact that the load circuit temperature is already higher than normal, due to the prior overload condition. Each time an overload condition is repeated, the LTM causes the breaker to trip in a time progressively earlier than the "Long Delay Time Setting". When the load current returns to normal, the LTM begins to reset; and after about 10 minutes it has reset fully, so that next Long Delay trip time will again be the "Setting" value. In certain applications it may be desirable to disable the LTM function. The LTM function can be disabled by (first opening the breaker and then) removing the Rating Plug (See Figures 1 and 6), and lastly moving the LTM jumper (inside the rating plug cavity, See figure 4.2.1) to its "INAC TIVE" connection. (You can enable the LTM function again any time you wish by moving the LTM jumper back to its original "ACTIVE" connection.) {/ '-'- Standard from Factory "L TM Active" ----' Rating Plug Cavity - 1'--J----- Fig Long Time Memory "LTM" Jumper "L TM Inactive" -- The action of the LTM is a factor to consider in performing multiple Long Delay Time tests. (See Section 5.4.) 2) There is a condition under which the Long Delay Trip LED can erroneously indicate a LOT has occurred, even though the breaker is still closed. This can happen when an overload current momentarily exceeds the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, so that the Long Delay LED flashes "RED" to indicate the overload condition. Then if, at the very moment when the LED is "ON", the load current would then suddenly drop to a value less than 10% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating, the trip unit stops functioning while the "4bit Latch Chip" (See Fig. 3) is set and the LED remains Lighted. If the current would again increase to a value above the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, and then return to normal, the

48 Page s LOT will reset itself. You can of course, manually clear the LOT (or any other trip indication) at any time, by pushing the "PUSH to RESET" button. (See Figure 1.) 4.4 Short Delay Current Setting There are eight (8) available Short Delay Current Settings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times 1, and the other two settings are "51" or "52" times 1,. (REMEMBER: I, is the Long Delay Current Setting). The values that "51" and "52" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section Short Delay Time Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.4, there are two different Short Delay curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2 t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2 t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the short delay current range than will the flat response n.,.. {"'.. Available Settings P>-... ' Short Delay 'u.- r=--. Setting 1:: 1, "" Fig. I, 1: ',,t1 In -\ 8, _.._ ""\ ---' 1 ; I LL '\. (1, ) - - ""\ L : J 51 and 52 Values are Specified on Rating Plug Short Delay Current Settings 5, 6, S,, S, Multiples of Long Delay Setting Five flat (.1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2 t (.1*,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2 t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the viewing window. The 1 2 t response is applicable to currents less than eight (8) times 1,, the Long Delay Setting. For currents greater than 8 times 1,, the 1 2 t response reverts to the flat response. Note: See also Section 3.6, Zone Interlocking, above. 4.6 Instantaneous Current Setting There are eight (8) available Instantaneous Current Settings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times (In) the rating plug value, and the I.L other two settings are "M1" or "M2" times (In). The values that "M1" and "M2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section NO Instantaneous Current Setting For types LS and LSG trip units, please see Sections 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) and 3.5 OVER RIDE (Fixed Instantaneous), for available fast-acting high short-circuit protection. 4.8 Ground Fault Current Setting The eight (8) Ground Fault Current Settings are labeled with the code letters "A" through "K" (except there are no "G" or "I" settings), as illustrated in Fig In general, the specific current settings range from 0.25 to 1.0 times (In), the rating plug value, but cannot exceed 1200 A. The specific Ground Current Settings for each letter are listed in Table 1 and on the applicable Time-Current curve for the breaker. Fig. 4.4 Sho. Delay Time (}]Sec. 0 I fj( --]m t,-.., '<:..j : I ',,, "' :J M I I w "*"In Viewing Window I r'l Indicates 1 1 l't Shape l...) J B X lr Short Delay Time Settings.1,.2,.3,..5 Seconds WI h Flat Responc e l't Shape Returns to Flat Response at CurrE 1ts Higher than 8 x 1,.14,.3*,.5 Seconds with l't Shape

49 I.L r-' r-, 1..,...1 1' I I,I I l l I I II I 1 Setting lnst. I L '.J"" I ffi:j xln : --\ \ J (9 I_ - Fig. 4.5 M1 and M2 Values are Specified on Rating Plug Instantaneous Current Settings Available Settings , 4, 5. 6, M,. M, In Multiples of Rating Plug Amperes On ) Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Setting Fig. 4.6 Available Setti ngs Gnd-Fault m A. B. C. D. UJ x ln E. F, H, K Specific Values e Given on Circuit Breaker Time-Current Curve and in Table 1 Ground Fa ult Current Settings TABLE 1 - GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS (AMPERES)<D Page 9 A B c D E F H K BO BB BB 250 " BO Cii LlJ c:: LlJ BO a_ B ::;;; BOO BO BOO C!l :::1 --' a_ BO C!l B 1200 z BO BOO c:: BOO LlJ --' B ' en 3000/ B <D Tolerances on settings are ±1 0% of values Refer to Type DS, type SPB or Series C A-Frame supplemental instruction leaflets given in Section 9 for list of available rating plugs for each type circuit breaker. 4.9 Ground Fault Time Delay Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.7, there are two different Ground Fault curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2 t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2 t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the ground fault current range than will the flat response. Five flat (.1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2 t (.1*,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2 t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the setting viewing window. The 1 2 t response is applicable to currents less than times the ampere rating of the installed rating plug (In). For currents greater than x In the 1 2 t response reverts to the flat response.

50 Page 10 Fig \ \ \\ Gnd Fault \, Tome ) OJ sec { 0 '""" I I I I I : nr::::== ] I \... _ :_ - - I n I J2t 1 I Available Settings.1,.2, Seconds with Flat Response Shape 1 / Returns to Flat Response at Approximately n.1*,.3*,.s ] I I I ',f 1 : I ' ' Seconds with ' ' I " "In Viewing Window, ' J't Shape Indicates ' '..._ - --l 12t Shape '- --- Ground Fa ult Time Delay Settings Note: See also Section 3.6 on Zone Interlocking. 5.0 TEST PROCEDURES 5.1 General A DANGER DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL, TEST OR PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENER GIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. DE-ENERGIZE THE CIRCUIT AND DISCONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTE NANCE OR TESTS. As illustrated in Figs. 1 and 5, an integral test panel is provided to test the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. Several no-trip settings are provided to check the trip unit operation without actually tripping the circuit breaker. Fig. 5 Breaker Trips At GT and GFT Test Amps J) x In Z; Test 0 Trip Reset 0 Unit 0 Status I.L Available "Test Amps" Settings CD "GT" =Phase Current Test at Gxln and TRIPS breaker; "1, 2, 3, 8 or 10" xi =Phase Current Test - NO reaker TRIP; "GFT" =Ground Current Test and TRIPS breaker; "GF" =Ground Current Test - NO breaker TRIP. See Section for inservice test trip limitations. Push, then release Trip Reset button to reset Trip Unit. Required following all automatic trip and test operations. Push, then release Test button to test. Test operation begins with release of pushbutton. Integral Te st Panel (Lower Right Corner of Trip Unit) A CAUTION TESTING A CIRCUIT BREAKER UNDER "TRIP CON DITIONS" WHILE IT IS IN SERVICE AND CARRYING LOAD CURRENT, WHETHER DONE BY INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL MEANS, IS NOT RECOMMENDED. ANY TRIPPING OPERATION WILL CAUSE DISRUP TION OF SERVICE AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM UNNECESSARY SWITCH ING OF CONNECTED EQUIPMENT. TESTING OF A CIRCUIT BREAKER THAT RESULTS IN THE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE DONE ONLY WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN THE "TEST" OR "DISCONNECTED" CELL POSITIONS OR WHILE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS ON A TEST BENCH. To preserve the primary protection function of the trip unit, all in-service testing under "Trip" or "No-Trip" conditions are only performed at load current values no greater than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,. Any attempt to conduct in-service testing when the load current exceeds 50% of 1,, will not be executed by the trip unit. Since the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is completely selfpowered using energy derived from the current sensors installed in the circuit breaker, all in-service tests conducted should be conducted with the auxiliary control power module, shown in Fig. 7, plugged into the trip unit. This action will avoid difficulties caused by load current levels that are too low to operate the trip unit. Effect1ve May 1997

51 I.L When To Test Tests can be conducted with the breaker in the "connected" cell position while carrying load current. However, as stated in the caution note in Section 5.1, good practice will limit circuit breaker in-service "trip tests", where required, to maintenance periods during times of minimum load conditions. Testing, prior to start-up can best be accomplished with the breaker out of its cell or in the ''Test", "Disconnected" or "Withdrawn" (or Removed) cell positions. Note: Since time-current settings are based on desired system coordination and protection schemes, the protection settings selected and preset in accordance with Section 4.0 above should not be altered during or as a part of any routine test sequence. 5.3 Test Provision As indicated in Fig. 5, six different ''Test Amps" settings (1, 2, 3, 6T, 8 and 1 OX In) are available for testing the phase elements of the trip unit, and two (GF, GFT) are provided for testing the ground elements. A CAUTION A SETTING OF EITHER 6T OR GFT WILL TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. (SEE SECTION BELOW.) For any combination of the phase protection settings, an appropriate "No Trip" condition can be set to test the long time, short time and instantaneous trip settings without tripping the circuit breaker. In the "GF" test position, the level of test current based on In, is adequate to demonstrate the operating condition of the trip unit without tripping the circuit breaker. This is a functional check only, not a calibration. 5.4 Conducting Tests 1) Before starting any test sequence, check the Unit Status (Green LED) in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) to be sure it is blinking on and off about once each second, which indicates that the trip unit is functioning normally. In the event the Unit Status LED is not blinking, install an Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7), or if you have one already, check to see that it is connected correctly. 2) If the circuit breaker is carrying current, check for the following conditions: Page 11 a) the current is not less than 1 0% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating; be sure the "GREEN" Unit Status LED (in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) is blinking on and off (indicating that there is enough current flowing to provide the power necessary to operate the trip unit). In the event the Unit Status LED is either lighted "GREEN" or "OFF" continuously, there is NOT enough current flowing to power the trip unit; and an APM (See Fig. 7} should be installed before proceeding with the test. and b) the current is not more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting (1,) ; because the trip unit will not execute your test instructions when it senses that the current through the breaker exceeds the 50% level. 3) When performing tests on the Long Delay element, be aware that in addition to the standard protection element, the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. (See NOTE 1 under Section 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting.) The action of the LT M will have the same effect of advancing the Long Delay Trip Time if multiple Long Delay Time tests are performed repeatedly - as one might do in making single phase tests on each pole of a breaker in succession, for example. If you have sufficient experience in performing tests with this kind of accelerated trip timing, you may be comfortable with the results of tests performed in quick succession. However, if there is any question, you may simply wait about ten (1 0) minutes after a Long Delay Trip for the LTM to reset, before you check the next pole Control Power For testing the trip unit, an optional Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) as shown in Fig. 7 is recommended. This Auxiliary Power Module, which operates from a separate 120 Vac supply, may be used when a drawout circuit breaker is in any of its four cell positions, i.e., "Connected", ''Test", "Disconnected" and "Withdrawn" (or "Removed.") Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM} (See Fig. 7}. Especially when the single phase current is low, without

52 Page 12 the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well-above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Plug in the Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) to insure control power is available for testing. When the APM is properly connected the "GREEN" Unit Status LED will blink on and off about once per second Not Tripping the Breaker 1. Place the ''Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the six "No Trip" test settings, i.e., 1, 2, 3, 8, or 10, x In, or GF Depress the (Black) ''Test" pushbutton and release it - the test starts when the pushbutton is released. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected "No Trip" test value, then the LED related to that function will turn on signifying successful completion of the test action. Note: During the long delay tests the Long Delay LED flashes "RED". 4. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the ''Trip Reset" pushbutton. All LEDs lighted by the "No Trip" test action should turn "OFF". Should an actual overload or fault condition occur during an in-service, "No Trip Test" sequence, the protection function will override the test function, and the circuit breaker will trip automatically in accordance with the actual Time-Current settings. Note: The "Trip Reset" pushbutton may be depressed at any time. However, should a test already be in progress, the test would be aborted. A test initiated via the integral test panel may be aborted at any time by depressing the ''Trip Reset" pushbutton Tripping the Breaker 1. Make sure that the circuit breaker is carrying no current. (See CAUTION notes under Section 5.1.) NOTE: In the event it is decided to perform a "Breaker Trip Test" while load current is flowing, make sure the circuit breaker is carrying no more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting lr- (The I.L trip unit will not execute your instructions to Test itself, when the load current exceeds 50% of 1,.) 2. Place the ''Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the two ''Trip" test settings, i.e., 6T or GFT. 3. Depress the black ''Test" pushbutton (See Fig. 5) and release it - the test is initiated when the pushbutton is released. 4. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected ''Test Amps" value, the circuit breaker will trip and the LED related to that function will light "RED". 5. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the ''Trip Reset" pushbutton (See Fig. 5). All LEDs lighted by the ''Trip" test action should turn "OFF". 6.0 BATTERY (INSIDE THE RATING PLUG) 6.1 General The battery has no part in the protection function of the trip unit. As indicated in Figs. 3 and 6, the battery is provided to maintain the "RED" LED indication of the cause of TRIP in the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. The battery is located in the rating plug along with a battery check pushbutton and a green battery check LED. 6.2 Battery Check The battery is a long life, lithium photo type unit. The status of the battery can be checked at any time by depressing the battery check pushbutton and observing the "G REEN" LED as shown in Fig. 6. If the battery check LED does not light "GREEN", replace the battery. The condition of the battery has no effect on the protection function of the trip unit. Even with the battery removed, the unit will still trip the breaker in accordance with its settings. However, without the battery, the cause of TRIP LED will not be lighted "RED". If the battery is replaced (or if an Auxiliary Power Module is plugged into the trip unit), one or more of the cause of Trip LED's may be illuminated. The user should push the red ''TRIP RESET" button to turn off the indications, and the trip unit will be ready to indicate the next cause of trip. 6.3 Battery Replacement The battery can be easily replaced from the front of the trip unit by lowering the hinged cover of the rating plug as shown in Fig. 6. The battery can then be removed by pulling the battery tab as shown in Fig. 6.

53 I.L Note: The battery can be replaced at any time, even while the circuit breaker is in service, without affecting the operation of the circuit breaker or its protection function. A CAUTION CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED WHEN REPLACING A BATTERY TO INSURE THAT THE CORRECT POLARITIES ARE OBSERVED. POLARITY MARK INGS ARE SHOWN ON THE RATING PLUG WHEN THE HINGED COVER IS OPEN AS INDICATED IN FIG. &. The replacement battery should be the same type or equivalent. Acceptable 3.0 volt lithium batteries may be Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Rating Plugs for A-Frame and SPB Breakers are Similar Rating Plug identification "Battery Check" Pushbutton ----' Typical Rating Plug Values for Short Delay 51 and S2 Instantaneous M1 and M2 Settings Battery "OK" if LED Lights "GREEN" when "Battery Check" Button is Pushed Trip Unit Connector (Fits into Keyed Cavity in Top Right Corner of Trip Unit. See Fig. 1) --,tat l'lm'mpm 1 ljiik'i mac wrwwr 4YA ;eyt UHll:mh Witl! lrthr li' r;p RM'S Auxiliary Power Module Page 13 obtained from the following companies under their type designation indicated: Company Varta Batteries, Inc. 150 Clarbrook Road Elmsford, N.Y Duracell South Broadway Tarrytown, N.Y (914) Sanyo Electric Inc. Battery Division 200 Riser Road Little Ferry, N.J Rating Plug Retention Screw I Polarity Marks Model CR 1/3N DL 1/3N CR 1/3N Battery Removal Tab l'!attery

54 Page AUXILIARY POWER MODULE The Auxiliary Power Module or APM (Cat No. PRTAAPM), illustrated in Fig. 7, is an encapsulated power supply that requires a 120 Vac input at either 50 or 60 Hz. It provides an output of 32 Vdc (nominal 40 Vdc open circuit) which can be used for testing a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. When a drawout circuit breaker is equipped with a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, it can be conveniently set and tested while the circuit breaker is out of its cell or in its cell in the ''Test", "Disconnect" or 'Withdrawn" positions by using the Auxiliary Power Module. The Auxiliary Power Module is equipped with a unique plug-in connector suitable only for plugging into the keyed receptacle in the upper right corner of a Digitrip RMS Trip Unit as shown in Fig. 1. This prohibits the possible use of an incorrect type power module. 8.0 FRAME RATINGS, (WHERE APPLICABLE, SENSOR RATINGS) AND RATING PLUGS The Frame Rating of a circuit breaker is the maximum RMS current it can carry continuously. The maximum Short-Circuit Current Rating of the Circuit breaker are usually related to the Frame Rating as well. It is often times desirable to be able to choose a current value (In), less than the full frame rating, to be the basis for the coordination of the circuit breaker's protection functions, without affecting its short-circuit current capability. For the Digitrip 510 trip unit this is implemented by changing the Rating Plug (and/or Current Sensors, where applicable - See your circuit breaker inst ructions (listed in Section 9.0 below) to determine if this applies to your circuit breaker). The (Current) Sensor Rating (where applicable) is the maximum RMS current the circuit breaker can carry with the specified current sensors installed. The Sensor Rating can be the same or less than the Frame Rating, but not greater. The Rating Plug (See Fig. 6) fits into a special cavity to complete the trip unit (See Fig. 1 ). Rating plugs have two current ratings listed on their covers (See Fig. 6): 1) the "Must be used with Frame Rated" cur- I.L rent value (or "Sensor Rated", if applicable), " and 2) "In (Rated I) = current value. This latter value, (In) is the basis for the trip unit current settings: 1) The Instantaneous and Ground Current Settings (if provided) are multiples of (In) (See Sections 4.6 and 4.8) 2) The Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, is a multiple of (In)- Long Delay Current Setting = 1, = LD x (In)- (See Section 4.2) 3) The Short Delay Current Setting (if provided) is indirectly dependent upon (In), because it is a multiple of 1,, which in turn is a multiple of (ln)- Short Delay Current Setting = SO x 1, (See Section 4.4) = SO X LD X (In)- Rating Plugs for the Digitrip RMS 510 trip units are marked for and may be applied on both 50 and 60 Hz systems. A CAUTION BEFORE YOU FIT THE RA TING PLUG INTO THE TRIP UNIT, BE SURE TO CHECK THAT THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RA TING IF APPLICABLE), MA TCH THOSE PRINTED ON THE RA TING PLUG COVER. INSTALLING A RA TING PLUG THA T DOES NOT MA TCH THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RATING (OR SENSOR RA TING, IF APPLICA BLE), CAN PRODUCE SERIOUS MISCOORDINA TION AND/OR FAILURE OF THE PROTECTION SYSTEM. Complete catalog descriptions of all available rating plugs are given in the applicable circuit breaker supplementary instruction leaflets. (See Section 9) Note: Rating plugs from Digitrip models 500/600nOO/ 800 CAN NOT be used with model 510 trip units. The connection pins are located in different positions, so that one cannot accidentally use the incorrect kind of plug.

55 I.L REFERENCES 9.1 Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies I.L I.L I.L Instructions for Digitrip RMS 51 0 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip RMS 610 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip RMS 81 0 Trip Unit 9.2 Type OS Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers I. B I. B AD SC SC SC B508 Instructions for Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Types DS and DSL Supplement B to Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Types DS and DSL Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Connection Diagram for Type OS Circuit Breakers 9.3 Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers I.L I.L AD SC SC SC I.S Instruction for the Systems Pow-R Breaker and Drawout Mechanism Supplementary Instructions for the Systems Pow-R Breaker used with the Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breaker Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) SPB Master Connection Diagram 9.4 Series c R-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers 29C106 29C107 29C713 AD R SC SC SC Frame Book Frame Instruction Leaflet Supplementary Instructions for Series c R-Frame used with the Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for R-Frame Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Page 15 I.L. 29C714 Master Connection Diagram for Series c R-Frame Circuit Breaker APPENDIX A ZONE INTERLOCKING Assume a ground fault of 2000 Amperes occurs and refer to Fig A.1. CASE 1: There is no Zone Selective Interlocking. (standard time delay coordination is used) Fault 3 The branch breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.1 s. Fault 2 The feeder breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.3 s. Fault 1 The breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.5 s. CASE 2: There is Zone Selective Interlocking Fault 3 The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault and Z3 will send an interlocking signal to the Z2 trip unit; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to Z1. Z1 and Z2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the branch breaker Z3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker Z2 will clear the fault in 0.3 s (as above). Similarly, in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 2 The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to the Z1 trip unit. Z1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 1 There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s. Figure A.2 presents a Zone Selective Interlocking connection diagram for a system with two main breakers from incoming sources and a bus tie breaker. Note the blocking diode 01 is needed so that the feeder breakers can send interlocking signals to both the main and tie breakers, without having the tie breaker send itself an interlocking signal.

56 Page 16 Fig. A. 1 f Q) g 1 N t Q) g 2 N t Fig. A.2., c 0 N A ) 1600 A ) I 200 A ) Main 0.5 Sec 1200 A Feeder 0.3 Sec 400 A Branch Z1 Z2 0.1 Sec Z3 100A Typical Zone Interlocking (Ground Fault Protection) M1 0.1 Sec 0.1 Sec I.L Notes: A1 : Wiring to be twisted pair of AWG No. 14 to AWG No. 20. Route Zone Interlocking wiring separate from power conductors. DO NOT GROUND any Zone Interlock Wiring. M2 0.5 Sec A2: The maximum distance between first and last zone is 250 feet (1 1 0 m). A3: A Maximum of 20 breakers may be connected in parallel in one Zone. F21 F22 F23 Legend =Common (Ungrounded) = Short Delay Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Short Delay I nput Signal from Lower Level Zone = Ground Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Ground Input Signal from Lower Level Zone ault at Location Sec 0.1 Sec 0.1 Sec Typical Zone Interlocking Connections with Two Main Breakers (M 1, M2) and a Tie Breaker (T) (Short Delay Protection)

57 I.L Page 17 NOTES

58 Page 18 I.L NOTES

59 I.L Page 19 NOTES

60 Page 20 This instruction booklet is published solely for information purposes and should not be considered all inclusive. If further information is required, you should consult Cutler-Hammer. Sale of product shown in this literature is subject to terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Cutler-Hammer Inc. selling policies or other contractual agreement between the parties. This literature is not intended to and does not enlarge or add to any such contract. The sole source governing the rights and remedies of any purchaser of this equipment is the contract between the purchaser and Cutler-Hammer Inc. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY, OR WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, ARE MADE REGARDING THE INFORMATION, RECOMMENDAT IONS AND DESCRIPTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN. In no event will Cutler-Hammer Inc. be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damage or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment, plant or power system, cost of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities, or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the use of the information, recommendations and description contained herein. Cutler-Hammer Inc Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, U.S.A. Style No. 7829C35H03 Printed in U.S.A./CCI I.L

61 ltogi Cutler-Hammer I.L Table of Contents Instructions for Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Page 1.0 General Description Protection Information Testing UL Listed Devices Principle of Operation General Trip and Operation Indicators Test Provisions DIScriminator (Making Current Release) OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) Zone Interlocking Protection Settings General Long Delay Current Settings Long Delay Time Settings Short Delay Current Settings Short Delay Time Settings Instantaneous Current Settings NO Instantaneous Current Settings Ground Fault Current Settings Ground Fault Time Delay Settings Test Procedure General When To Test Test Provision Conducting Tests Control Power Not Tripping the Breaker Tripping the Breaker Battery (Inside the Rating Plug) General Battery Check Battery Replacement Auxiliary Power Module Frame Ratings, (where applicable, Sensor Ratings) and Rating Plugs References Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies Type DS Low Vo ltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Type SPB Systems Pow-A Breakers Series C14 A-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Appendix A Zone Interlocking - Example... 15, Supersedes LL. 29 BB5A dated September 1994 A WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL OR PERFORM MAIN TENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENERGIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT NO VOLTAGE IS PRESENT BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE TASK, AND ALWAYS FOLLOW GENERALLY ACCEPTED SAFETY PROCEDURES. CUTLER-HAMMER IS NOT LIABLE FOR THE MISAPPLICATION OR MISINSTAL LATION OF ITS PRODUCTS. It is strongly urged that the user observe all recommendations, warnings and cautions relating to the safety of personnel and equipment, as well as general and local health and safety laws, codes, and procedures. The recommendations and information contained herein are based on experience and judgment, but should not be considered to be all-inclusive or covering every application or circumstance which may arise. If you have any questions or need further information or instructions, please contact your local representative, or the Customer Support Center for the type of circuit breaker you have: Circuit Call Send to Breaker Telephone FAX Type Number Number DS/DSL (412) (41 2) SPB (412) (41 2) Series c R-Frame (412) (41 2) GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.1 Protection The Digitrip RMS 510, illustrated in Fig. 1, is a custom application specific integrated circuit based trip unit suitable for use in types DS and DSL low voltage AC power circuit breakers and type SPB Systems Pow-A circuit breakers and Series c A-Frame molded case circuit breakers. The Digitrip RMS 510 provides true RMS current sensing for proper correlation with thermal characteristics of conductors and equipment. Interchangeable rating plugs are provided to establish the continuous current rating of each circuit breaker.

62 Page 2 The Digitrip RMS 51 0 Trip Unit is completely self-contained and when the circuit breaker is closed, requires no external control power to operate its protection systems. It operates from current signal levels and control power derived through current sensors integrally mounted in the circuit breaker. The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is available in six different types. Each trip unit may be equipped with a maximum of five phase and two ground (time-current) adjustments to meet specific application requirements. The types of protection available for each model include the following, which are illustrated in Figures 2.1 through 2.6: Protection Long Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Short Time Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/ Ground Fig. 1 Circuit Breaker Assembly Cell Location Reference LED's light "RED" to indicate cause of trip Time-Current Curve., for Phase Protection Time-Current Curve., tor Ground Protection View Settings in Window Types Ll* LS* LSI* LIG LSG LSIG Refer to Figure Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Model LSIG with Rating Plug I.L Note*: RMS Digitrip Type Ll, LS, and LSI trip units can be applied on 3-pole or 4-pole circuit breakers for protection of the neutral circuit, IF the circuit breaker is wired and MARKED for NEUTRA L PROTECTION. Refer to the National Electric Code for appropriate application of 4-pole breakers. 1.2 Information Light Emitting Diodes (LED's) on the face of the trip unit light "Red" to indicate the reason for an automatic trip operation. The battery in the rating plug maintains the reason for trip indication following an automatic trip operation, until the "TRIP RESET" button is pushed. The "Green" LED in the lower right corner "blinks" to indicate the trip unit is operating normally. The battery in the rating plug is "OK" if the LED lights "Green" when the "battery check" button next to it is pushed. (See Section 6.). Note: The Digitrip RMS 510 provides all of its protection functions regardless of the status of the battery. The battery serves only to maintain the indication of the reason for automatic trip. Adjust Protection Settings for Desired Values with Rotary Swi!ches Trip Unit Operational Status "Blinking Green"=OK R-F"ra!Tie Rating Plug

63 I.L Fig Long Time/Instantaneous Protection (L I) Fig. 2.2 Long Time/Short Time Protection (LS) Fig. 2.3 Fig. 2.4 Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Protection (LSI) Page 3 Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LIG)

64 Page 4 Fig Testing Long Time/Short Time/Ground/Protection (LSG) To test the trip unit, use the integral test panel. (See Section 5.0.) 2.0 UL LISTED DEVICES Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Units are "Listed" by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Under UL File E7819, for use in types DS, DSL, SPB and Series c A-Frame circuit breakers. 3.0 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 3.1 General The Digitrip RMS 510 trip unit is designed for use in industrial circuit breaker environments where the ambient temperatures can range from -20 C to +85 C and rarely exceed 70 to 75 C. If, however, temperatures in the neighborhood of the trip unit do exceed this range, the trip unit performance may be degraded. In order to insure that the tripping function is not compromised due to an over-temperature condition, the Digitrip RMS 510 microcomputer chip has a built-in over-temperature protection feature, factory set to trip the breaker if the chip temperature exceeds 95 C. If over-temperature is the reason for the trip, the Long Delay Time LED will light "RED". Fig. 2.6 I.L Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LSIG) The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip unit provides three basic functions: Protection, Information and Testing. A typical trip unit and rating plug are illustrated in Fig. 1. Individual product instruction leaflets referenced in Section 9.0 illustrate typical Digitrip RMS Trip Units installed in specific breakers. The trip unit employs the Cutler-Hammer Inc. custom designed integrated circuit SJ.!HE + chip, which includes a microcomputer to perform its numeric and logic functions. The principle of operation is described by the block diagram shown in Fig. 3. In the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, all required sensing and tripping power to operate its protection function is derived from the current sensors in the circuit breaker. The secondary currents from these sensors provide the correct input information for the protection functions, as well as tripping power, whenever the circuit breaker is carrying current. These current signals develop analog voltages across the appropriate calibrating resistors including: 1) Phase currents 2) Ground current (when supplied) 3) Rating plug The resulting analog voltages are digitized by the custom designed integrated circuits.

65 I.L Page 5 Fig. 3 A 8 c.. I )_ ', I T F lu, :: : : : t:: DI; TJ Fi}iv{;;': ndfp.c ; ng t t t :, ;:2 ;"'' ) ) }-. ; l : :; gu e OITRIPILOCatcd 1 s...-sw10n 3 On ron! P nel See s.. wun 12 Or Tvprcat Ground Pt>ase Cahll<dt on Resrstor Digitrip RMS 510 Block Diagram with Breaker Interface The microcomputer, in cyclic fashion, repeatedly scans the voltage values across each calibrating resistor and enters these values into its Random Access Memory (RAM). These data are used to calculate true RMS current values, which are then repeatedly compared with the protection function settings and other operating data stored in the Read Only Memory (ROM). The software program then determines whether to initiate protection functions, including tripping the breaker through the low energy trip device (Flux Transfer Shunt Trip or Direct Trip Actuator) in the circuit breaker. 3.2 Trip and Operation Indicators The LEOs, shown in Figs. 1 and , on the face of the trip unit, light "RED" to indicate the reason for any automatic trip operation. As indicated in Figs , each LED is strategically located in the related segment of the time-current curve depicted on the face of the trip unit. The reason for trip is identified by the segment of the time-current curve where the LED is lighted "RED". Following an automatic trip operation, the back-up battery, continues to supply power to the LEOs as indicated in Figs. 3 and 6. To check the status of the battery, see Section 6. Push the "Trip Reset" button shown in Fig. 1, to turn "Off" the LEOs following a trip operation. A green colored LED, as shown in Fig. 1, indicates the operational status of the trip unit. Once the load current through the circuit breaker exceeds approximately 10% of the frame/current sensor rating, the green LED will flash "On" and "Off" once each second, to indicate the trip unit is energized and operating properly. Note: If the LED is steadily "GREEN", i.e. not flashing, the trip unit is not ready. Integrated Circuit S)..lRE+ TM Chip 3.3 Test Provisions (See Section 5.0) 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) (For Types LS and LSG trip units only.) TropUr101 Opllr&llng Stalu' lr1drlatcr 1Fia$htnQ GREE'IIInd catesqk, SeeSecuon3.2 When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equ ipped with an adjustable instantaneous protection setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, a making current release (or DIScriminator) circuit is provided. This circuit will prevent the circuit breaker from being closed and latched-in on a faulted circuit. The non-adjustable release is pre-set at eleven (1 1) times the installed rating plug current (In). The making current release is enabled only for the first ten (1 0) cycles following an initial circuit breaker closing operation, provided the load current exceeds approximately 10% of the circuit breaker frame (or current sensor) rating. Should the load current through the circuit breaker drop to less than the 10% value, the release will reset. The release, once reset, will remain enabled until the load current passing through the circuit breaker has exceeded the 10% value for 10 cycles. The making current release will trip the circuit breaker instantaneously. In the event the breaker is intended to close (but not to trip out again) into a circuit whose current could initially be higher than 11 x In, it is possible to make the DIScriminator inactive. If the breaker does close onto a fully rated fault current, when the DIScriminator is inactive, the breaker will wait for the full short-time delay setting before it trips. The DIScriminator (making current release) can be made inactive by turning the "OVERRIDE/" setting switch (nearest the bottom edge of the trip unit) from the "DIS" position, to the "[BLANK]" position. (See Figs. 2.2 and 2.5.)

66 Page S Notes: 1 This switch has eight (8) positions, and seven (7) of them show "DIS' in the window, while ONLY ONE position shows "[BLANK]". 2 When the "OVERRIDE/'' window shows "[BLANK]", the only fast-acting high short-circuit protection available is the OVERRIDE [Fixed Instantaneous]. (See 3.5 below.) 3.5 OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) (For Types LS And LSG Trip Units Only) When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, the Fixed Instantaneous "Override" analog trip circuit is automatically pre-set to a value no greater than the short-time withstand current rating of the circuit breaker in which the trip unit is installed. Since the specific values vary for different circuit breaker types and ratings, refer to time-current curves, listed in Section 9, for the values applicable to your breaker. If breaker trips due to high instantaneous current, the "OVERRIDE" LED will light "RED". 3.6 Zone Interlocking Zone Selective Interlocking (or Zone Interlocking) is available (see Fig. 3) for Digitrip RMS Trip Units having Short Delay and/or Ground Fault protection. Zone Selective Interlocking provides the fastest possible tripping for faults within the breaker's zone of protection, and yet also provides positive coordination among all breakers in the system (mains, ties, feeders and downstream breakers) to limit the outage to the affected part of the system only. When Zone Interlocking is enabled, a fault within the breaker's zone of protection will cause the RMS DIG ITRIP trip unit to: a) Trip the affected breaker instantaneously, and at the same time b) Send a signal to upstream RMS DIGITRIP trip units to restrain from tripping immediately. The restraining signal causes the upstream breakers to follow their set coordination times, so that only the minimum service is disrupted, while the fault is cleared in the shortest time possible. (This signal requires only a single pair of wires from the output terminals of the downstream breaker's trip unit to the input terminals of the upstream breaker's trip unit. For specific instructions see the applicable connection diagrams for your breaker listed in Section 9.0.) I.L Note: If a breaker (M) receives a Zone Interlocking signal from another breaker (F), but the fault current level is less than the trip unit setting for breaker (M), the signal from the other breaker (F) will not cause breaker (M) to trip. A CAUTION IF ZONE INTERLOCKING IS NOT TO BE USED (I.E. STANDARD TIME-DELAY COORDINATION ONLY IS INTENDED), THE ZONE INTERLOCKING TERMINALS MUST BE CONNECTED WITH JUMPER WIRES, AS SPECIFIED ON THE CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR YOUR BREAKER (SEE SECTION 9.0), SO THE TIME DELAY SETTINGS WILL PROVIDE THE INTENDED COORDINATION. For an example of how Zone Selective Interlocking may be used, See Appendix A. 4.0 PROTECTION SETTINGS 4.1 General Prior to placing circuit breaker in operation, each trip unit protection setting must be set to the values specified by the engineer responsible for the installation. The number of settings that must be made is determined by the protector model supplied as illustrated in Figs. 2.1 through 2.6. Each setting is made with a rotary switch, using a small screwdriver. The selected setting for each adjustment appears in its respective rectangular viewing window as illustrated in Fig. 1. The installed rating plug establishes the maximum continuous current rating of the circuit breaker (In). Instantaneous and ground current settings are defined in multiples of (In). To illustrate the effect of each protection curve setting, simulated Time-Current curves are pictured on the face of the trip unit. The rotary switch to make each setting is located nearest that portion of the simulated Time-Current curve it controls. Should an automatic "trip" occur (as a result of the current exceeding the pre-selected value), the LED in the appropriate segment of the simulated Time-Current curve will light "RED" indicating the reason for "trip". The available settings, along with the illustrated effect of changing the settings, are given in Figs. 4.1 through 4.7.

67 ... I.L Long Delay Current Setting There are eight (8) available Long Delay Settings, as illustrated in Fig Each setting, called "/;' is expressed as a multiple (ranging from.5 to 1) of the rating plug current (ln)- Note: "1," is also the basis for the Short-Delay Current Setting. (See Section 4.4.) Fig Long Delay Setting 1, [I]x In = 1, Long Delay Current Settings 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting t, Available Settings.5,.6,.7,.8,.85,.9,.95, 1 In Multiples of Rating Plug Amperes ll n l There are eight (8) available Long Delay Time Settings, as illustrated in Fig. 4.2, ranging from 2 to 24 seconds. These settings are the total clearing times when the current value equals six (6) times 1,. Fig. 4.2 Notes: 6xl, Long Delay Time Settings Available Settings 2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24 Seconds at 6 Times Long Delay Setting (1,) 1) In addition to the standard Long Delay Protection Element, the Digitrip RMS 510 trip unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. If a breaker is reclosed soon after a Long Delay Trip, and the current again exceeds the Long Delay Setting, 1, the LTM automatically reduces the time to trip, to Page 7 allow for the fact that the load circuit temperature is already higher than normal, due to the prior overload condition. Each time an overload condition is repeated, the LTM causes the breaker to trip in a time progressively earlier than the "Long Delay Time Setting". When the load current returns to normal, the LTM begins to reset; and after about 10 minutes it has reset fully, so that next Long Delay trip time will again be the "Setting" value. In certain applications it may be desirable to disable the LTM function. The LTM function can be disabled by (first opening the breaker and then) removing the Rating Plug (See Figures 1 and 6), and lastly moving the LTM jumper (inside the rating plug cavity, See figure 4.2.1) to its "INAC TIVE" connection. (You can enable the LTM function again any time you wish by moving the LTM jumper back to its original "ACTIVE" connection.) - Rating Plug Cavity, \./ Standard from Factory "L TM Active" J "L TM Inactive" -- Fig Long Time Memory "LTM" Jumper The action of the LTM is a factor to consider in performing multiple Long Delay Time tests. (See Section 5.4.) 2) There is a condition under which the Long Delay Trip LED can erroneously indicate a LOT has occurred, even though the breaker is still closed. This can happen when an overload current momentarily exceeds the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, so that the Long Delay LED flashes "RED" to indicate the overload condition. Then if, at the very moment when the LED is "ON", the load current would then suddenly drop to a value less than 10% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating, the trip unit stops functioning while the "4bit Latch Chip" (See Fig. 3) is set and the LED remains Lighted. If the current would again increase to a value above the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, and then return to normal, the

68 Page 8 LOT will reset itself. You can of course, manually clear the LOT (or any other trip indication) at any time, by pushing the "PUSH to RESET" button. (See Figure 1.) 4.4 Short Delay Current Setting There are eight (8) available Short Delay Current Settings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times 1, and the other two settings are "S1" or "S2" times 1,. (REMEMBER: I, is the Long Delay Current Setting). The values that "S1" and "S2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section Short Delay Time Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.4, there are two different Short Delay curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2 t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2 t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the short delay current range than will the flat response. ',"" " {"-.. Available Settings (-:>-... ' Short Delay ' '.:-.. 2, 2.5, Setting t:"... _,, _ 5, 6. S,. S, Mol<;p/, o1 _, ; 1 Long Delay Setting S I, Fig : ' ;;- r lo?: l = - L ' ) 51 and 52 Values are Specified on Rating Plug Short Delay Current Settings Five flat (.1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2 t (.1*,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2 t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the viewing window. The 1 2 t response is applicable to currents less than eight (8) times 1,, the Long Delay Setting. For currents greater than 8 times 1,, the 1 2 t response reverts to the flat response. Note: See also Section 3.6, Zone Interlocking, above. 4.6 Instantaneous Current Setting There are eight (8) available Instantaneous Current Settings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times (In) the rating plug value, and the I.L other two settings are "M1" or "M2" times (In). The values that "M1" and "M2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section NO Instantaneous Current Setting For types LS and LSG trip units, please see Sections 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) and 3.5 OVER RIDE (Fixed Instantaneous), for available fast-acting high short-circuit protection. 4.8 Ground Fault Current Setting The eight (8) Ground Fault Current Settings are labeled with the code letters "A" through "K" (except there are no "G" or "I" settings), as illustrated in Fig In general, the specific current settings range from 0.25 to 1.0 times (In), the rating plug value, but cannot exceed 1200 A. The specific Ground Current Settings for each letter are listed in Table 1 and on the applicable Time-Current curve for the breaker. Fig. 4.4 Sho.' Delay Time 8] Sec. 0 :s I fj f._,_] ill 1,"-..._ -.:;.J 1 -,.... "*"In Viewing Window..,... I -,.:J M I I w r'l Indicates 1 1 l't Shape I.._J 8 X I, Short Delay Time Settings Seconds w1 h Flat Responc e Ft Shape Returns to Flat Response at Cu rre 1ts Higher than 8 x 1,.1,.3*,.5* Seconds with l>t Shape

69 I.L Fig. 4.5 r-, I I I I Setting lnst. X :_--_-J I L In M1 and M2 Values are Specified on Rating Plug Instantaneous Current Settings Ava ilable Settings , 3, 4, 5, 6, M,, M, In Multiples of Rating Pl ug Amperes O n l Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Setting Fig. 4.6 Gnd-Fault m x l n e 01 Available Settings A, B. C, D. E. F. H, K Ground Fa ult Current Settings Specific Values Given on Circuit Breaker Time-Current Curve and in Table 1 TABLE 1 -GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS (AMPERES)CD A B c D E F H K Page BO "' 300 Cii BB BB BO L1J c:: L1J BO a. :::; B 1B B 630 BOO BO BO 600 BOO (!} ::> -' a BO (!} B B 1200 z BO BOO c:: BOO Cl L1J B ' -' en 3000/ BOO B CD Tolerances on settings are ±1 0% of values shown. 0 Refer to Type DS, type SPB or Series C R-Frame supplemental instruction leaflets given in Section 9 for list of available rating plugs for each type circuit breaker. 4.9 Ground Fault Time Delay Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.7, there are two different Ground Fault curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2 t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2 t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the ground fault current range than will the flat response. Five flat (.1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2 t (.1*,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2 t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the setting viewing window. The 1 2 t response is applicable to currents less than times the ampere rating of the installed rating plug (In). For currents greater than x In the 1 2 t response reverts to the flat response

70 .. Page 10 Fig \ \ \\ Gnd Fault \, Tome \[}]Sec. 0 ""' I I I I 1 : Available Settings : \ I.1 ] I \. _ Seconds with I 1 l _ - _I Flat Response : _1 :: I l't Shape I 1 / Returns to Flat I Response at Approximately n I I ' *,.3*,.s I 1 :'.....,f, '.. I Seconds with ' ' " "In Viewing Window ' ' I 12t Shape '.._---, I ndicates ' t Shape ] Ground Fa ult Time Delay Settings Note: See also Section 3.6 on Zone Interlocking. 5.0 TEST PROCEDURES 5.1 General A DANGER DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL, TEST OR PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENER GIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. DE-ENERGIZE THE CIRCUIT AND DISCONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTE NANCE OR TESTS. As illustrated in Figs. 1 and 5, an integral test panel is provided to test the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. Several no-trip settings are provided to check the trip unit operation without actually tripping the circuit breaker. -- Breaker Trips At 6T and GFT Fig. 5 Test :Il xln z 0 Trip Reset O Unit 0 Status I.L Available "Test Amps" Settings CD "GT" =Phase Current Test at Gxln and TRIPS breaker; "1, 2, 3, 8 or 10" xi =Phase Current Test NO 'breaker TRIP; "GFT" =Ground Current Test and TRIPS breaker; "GF" =Ground Current Test - NO breaker TRIP. See Section for inser vice test trip limitations. Push, then release Trip Reset button to reset Trip Unit. Required following all automatic trip and test operations. Push, then release Test button to test. Test operation begins with release of pushbutton. Integral Test Panel (Lower Right Corner of Trip Unit) A CAUTION TESTING A CIRCUIT BREAKER UNDER "TRIP CON DITIONS" WHILE IT IS IN SERVICE AND CARRYING LOAD CURRENT, WHETHER DONE BY INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL MEANS, IS NOT RECOMMENDED. ANY TRIPPING OPERATION WILL CAUSE DISRUP TION OF SERVICE AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM UNNECESSARY SWITCH ING OF CONNECTED EQUIPMENT. TESTING OF A CIRCUIT BREAKER THAT RESULTS IN THE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE DONE ONLY WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN THE "TEST" OR "DISCONNECTED" CELL POSITIONS OR WHILE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS ON A TEST BENCH. To preserve the primary protection function of the trip unit, all in-service testing under "Trip" or "No-Trip" conditions are only performed at load current values no greater than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,. Any attempt to conduct in-service testing when the load current exceeds 50% of 1,, will not be executed by the trip unit. Since the Digit rip RMS 510 Trip Unit is completely selfpowered using energy derived from the current sensors installed in the circuit breaker, all in-service tests conducted should be conducted with the auxiliary control power module, shown in Fig. 7, plugged into the trip unit. This action will avoid difficulties caused by load current levels that are too low to operate the trip unit.

71 I.L When To Test Tests can be conducted with the breaker in the "connected" cell position while carrying load current. However, as stated in the caution note in Section 5.1, good practice will limit circuit breaker in-service '1rip tests", where required, to maintenance periods during times of minimum load conditions. Testing, prior to start-up can best be accomplished with the breaker out of its cell or in the ''Test", "Disconnected" or "Withdrawn" (or Removed) cell positions. Note: Since time-current settings are based on desired system coordination and protection schemes, the protection settings selected and preset in accordance with Section 4.0 above should not be altered during or as a part of any routine test sequence. 5.3 Test Provision As indicated in Fig. 5, six different "Test Amps" settings (1, 2, 3, 6T, 8 and 1 OX In) are available for testing the phase elements of the trip unit, and two (GF, GFT) are provided for testing the ground elements. A CAUTION A SETTING OF EITHER 6T OR GFT WILL TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. (SEE SECTION BELOW.) For any combination of the phase protection settings, an appropriate "No Trip" condition can be set to test the long time, short time and instantaneous trip settings without tripping the circuit breaker. In the "GP' test position, the level of test current based on In, is adequate to demonstrate the operating condition of the trip unit without tripping the circuit breaker. This is a functional check only, not a calibration. 5.4 Conducting Tests 1) Before starting any test sequence, check the Unit Status (Green LED) in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) to be sure it is blinking on and off about once each second, which indicates that the trip unit is functioning normally. In the event the Unit Status LED is not blinking, install an Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7), or if you have one already, check to see that it is connected correctly. 2) If the circuit breaker is carrying current, check for the following conditions: 3) Page 1 1 a) the current is not less than 1 0% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating; be sure the "GREEN" Unit Status LED (in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) is blinking on and off (indicating that there is enough current flowing to provide the power necessary to operate the trip unit). In the event the Unit Status LED is either lighted "GREEN" or "OFF" continuously, there is NOT enough current flowing to power the trip unit; and an APM (See Fig. 7) should be installed before proceeding with the test. and b) the current is not more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting Ur); because the trip unit will not execute your test instructions when it senses that the current through the breaker exceeds the 50% level. When performing tests on the Long Delay element, be aware that in addition to the standard protection element, the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. (See NOTE 1 under Section 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting.) The action of the LT M will have the same effect of advancing the Long Delay Trip Time if multiple Long Delay Time tests are performed repeatedly - as one might do in making single phase tests on each pole of a breaker in succession, for example. If you have sufficient experience in performing tests with this kind of accelerated trip timing, you may be comfortable with the results of tests performed in quick succession. However, if there is any question, you may simply wait about ten (1 0) minutes after a Long Delay Trip for the LTM to reset, before you check the next pole Control Power For testing the trip unit, an optional Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) as shown in Fig. 7 is recommended. This Auxiliary Power Module, which operates from a separate 120 Vac supply, may be used when a drawout circuit breaker is in any of its four cell positions, i.e., "Connected", ''Test", "Disconnected" and "Withdrawn" (or "Removed.") Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without

72 Page 12 the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well-above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Plug in the Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) to insure control power is available for testing. When the APM is properly connected the "GREEN" Unit Status LED will blink on and off about once per second Not Tripping the Breaker Place the ''Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the six "No Trip" test settings, i.e., 1, 2, 3, 8, or 10, x In, or GF. Depress the (Black) ''Test" pushbutton and release it - the test starts when the pushbutton is released. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected "No Trip" test value, then the LED related to that function will turn on signifying successful completion of the test action. Note: During the long delay tests the Long Delay LED flashes "RED". Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the ''Trip Reset" pushbutton. All LEOs lighted by the "No Trip" test action should turn "OFF". Should an actual overload or fault condition occur during an in-service, "No Trip Test" sequence, the protection function will override the test function, and the circuit breaker will trip automatically in accordance with the actual Time-Current settings. Note: The "Trip Reset" pushbutton may be depressed at any time. However, should a test already be in progress, the test would be aborted. A test initiated via the integral test panel may be aborted at any time by depressing the ''Trip Reset" pushbutton Tripping the Breaker 1. Make sure that the circuit breaker is carrying no current. (See CAUTION notes under Section 5.1.) NOTE: In the event it is decided to perform a "Breaker Trip Test" while load current is flowing, make sure the circuit breaker is carrying no more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting lr (The I.L trip unit will not execute your instructions to Test itself, when the load current exceeds 50% of lr) 2. Place the ''Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the two "Trip" test settings, i.e., 6T or GFT. 3. Depress the black "Test" pushbutton (See Fig. 5) and release it - the test is initiated when the pushbutton is released. 4. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected ''Test Amps" value, the circuit breaker will trip and the LED related to that function will light "RED". 5. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the ''Trip Reset" pushbutton (See Fig. 5). All LEOs lighted by the ''Trip" test action should turn "OFF". 6.0 BATTERY (INSIDE THE RATING PLUG) 6.1 General The battery has no part in the protection function of the trip unit. As indicated in Figs. 3 and 6, the battery is provided to maintain the "RED" LED indication of the cause of TRIP in the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. The battery is located in the rating plug along with a battery check pushbutton and a green battery check LED. 6.2 Battery Check The battery is a long life, lithium photo type unit. The status of the battery can be checked at any time by depressing the batte ry check pushbutton and observing the "GREEN" LED as shown in Fig. 6. If the battery check LED does not light "GREEN", replace the battery. The condition of the battery has no effect on the protection function of the trip unit. Even with the battery removed, the unit will still trip the breaker in accordance with its settings. However, without the battery, the cause of TRIP LED will not be lighted "RED". If the battery is replaced (or if an Auxiliary Power Module is plugged into the trip unit), one or more of the cause of Trip LED's may be illuminated. The user should push the red ''TRIP RESET" button to turn off the indications, and the trip unit will be ready to indicate the next cause of trip. 6.3 Battery Replacement The battery can be easily replaced from the front of the trip unit by lowering the hinged cover of the rating plug as shown in Fig. 6. The battery can then be removed by pulling the battery tab as shown in Fig. 6.

73 I.L Note: The battery can be replaced at any time, even while the circuit breaker is in service, without affecting the operation of the circuit breaker or its protection function. A CAUTION CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED WHEN REPLACING A BATTERY TO INSURE THAT THE CORRECT POLARITIES ARE OBSERVED. POLARITY MARK INGS ARE SHOWN ON THE RATING PLUG WHEN THE HINGED COVER IS OPEN AS INDICATED IN FIG. 6. The replacement battery should be the same type or equivalent. Acceptable 3.0 volt lithium batteries may be Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Rating Plug is for Type Values for Short Delay 51 and S2 DS Circuit Broakers O nly Instantaneous M1 and M2 Rating Plugs for R-Frame and SPB Breakers are Similar Rating Plug Identification Typical Rating Plug Settings Trip Unit Connector (Fits into Keyed Cavity in Top Right Corner of Trip Umt. See Fig. 1) -- Cat P'Ri!APM UlWAC &Uli!Hr Jritl t 'J:I'J;J 4" 4 f4f l.j$t One! WJ$!y;-t t;q;tr.;!1 S \)l':j!s - Fii#!W!-& Auxiliary Power Module Page 13 obtained from the following companies under their type designation indicated: Company Varta Batteries, Inc. 150 Clarbrook Road Elmsford, N. Y Duracell South Broadway Ta rrytown, N.Y (914) Sanyo Electric Inc. Battery Division 200 Riser Road Little Ferry, N.J Polarity Marks Model CR 1/3N DL 1/3N CR 1/3N Batte y Remova1 Tab Battery

74 Page AUXILIARY POWER MODULE The Auxiliary Power Module or APM (Cat No. PRTAAPM), illustrated in Fig. 7, is an encapsulated power supply that requires a 120 Vac input at either 50 or 60 Hz. It provides an output of 32 Vdc (nominal 40 Vdc open circuit) which can be used for testing a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. When a drawout circuit breaker is equipped with a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, it can be conveniently set and tested while the circuit breaker is out of its cell or in its cell in the "Test", "Disconnect" or "Withdrawn" positions by using the Auxiliary Power Module. The Auxiliary Power Module is equipped with a unique plug-in connector suitable only for plugging into the keyed receptacle in the upper right corner of a Digitrip RMS Trip Unit as shown in Fig. 1. This prohibits the possible use of an incorrect type power module. 8.0 FRAME RATINGS, (WHERE APPLICABLE, SENSOR RATINGS) AND RATING PLUGS The Frame Rating of a circuit breaker is the maximum RMS current it can carry continuously. The maximum Short-Circuit Current Rating of the Circuit breaker are usually related to the Frame Rating as well. It is often times desirable to be able to choose a current value (In), less than the full frame rating, to be the basis for the coordination of the circuit breaker's protection functions, without affecting its short-circuit current capability. For the Digitrip 510 trip unit this is implemented by changing the Rating Plug (and/or Current Sensors, where applicable - See your circuit breaker instructions (listed in Section 9.0 below) to determine if this applies to your circuit breaker). The (Current) Sensor Rating (where applicable) is the maximum RMS current the circuit breaker can carry with the specified current sensors installed. The Sensor Rating can be the same or less than the Frame Rating, but not greater. The Rating Plug (See Fig. 6) fits into a special cavity to complete the trip unit (See Fig. 1 ). Rating plugs have two current ratings listed on their covers (See Fig. 6): 1) the "Must be used with Frame Rated" cur- I.L rent value (or "Sensor Rated", if applicable), and 2) "In (Rated I) =" current value. This latter value, (In) is the basis for the trip unit current settings: 1) The Instantaneous and Ground Current Settings (if provided) are multiples of (In) (See Sections 4.6 and 4.8) 2) The Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, is a multiple of (In). Long Delay Current Setting = 1, = LD x (In). (See Section 4.2) 3) The Short Delay Current Setting (if provided) is indirectly dependent upon (In), because it is a multiple of 1,, which in turn is a multiple of (In). Short Delay Current Setting =SOx 1, = SO X LD X (In). (See Section 4.4) Rating Plugs for the Digitrip RMS 510 trip units are marked for and may be applied on both 50 and 60 Hz systems. A CAUTION BEFORE YOU FIT THE RA TING PLUG INTO THE TRIP UNIT, BE SURE TO CHECK THAT THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RA TING IF APPLICABLE), MA TCH THOSE PRINTED ON THE RA TING PLUG COVER. INSTALLING A RA TING PLUG THA T DOES NOT MA TCH THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RATING, IF APPLICA BLE}, CAN PRODUCE SERIOUS MISCOORDINA TION AND/OR FA ILURE OF THE PROTECTION SYSTEM. Complete catalog descriptions of all available rating plugs are given in the applicable circuit breaker supplementary instruction leaflets. (See Section 9) Note: Rating plugs from Digitrip models 500/GOOnOO/ 800 CAN NOT be used with model 510 trip units. The connection pins are located in different positions, so that one cannot accidentally use the incorrect kind of plug.

75 I.L REFERENCES 9.1 Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies I.L I.L I.L Instructions for Digitrip RMS 51 0 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip RMS 610 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip RMS 81 0 Trip Unit 9.2 Type OS Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers I.B I. B AD SC SC SC B508 Instructions for Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Types DS and DSL Supplement B to Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Types DS and DSL Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Connection Diagram for Ty pe DS Circuit Breakers 9.3 Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers I.L I.L AD SC SC SC I.S Instruction for the Systems Pow-R Breaker and Drawout Mechanism Supplementary Instructions for the Systems Pow-R Breaker used with the Digitrip AMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breaker Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) SPB Master Connection Diagram 9.4 Series c R-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers 29C106 29C107 29C713 AD R SC SC SC Frame Book Frame Instruction Leaflet Supplementary Instructions for Series c A-Frame used with the Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for A-Frame Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Page 15 I.L. 29C714 Master Connection Diagram for Series c R-Frame Circuit Breaker APPENDIX A ZONE INTERLOCKING Assume a ground fault of 2000 Amperes occurs and refer to Fig A.1. CASE 1: There is no Zone Selective Interlocking. (standard time delay coordination is used) Fault 3 The branch breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.1 s. Fault 2 The feeder breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.3 S. Fault 1 The breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.5 s. CASE 2: There is Zone Selective Interlocking Fault 3 The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault and Z3 will send an interlocking signal to the Z2 trip unit; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to Z1. Z1 and Z2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the branch breaker Z3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker Z2 will clear the fault in 0.3 s (as above). Similarly, in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 2 The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to the Z1 trip unit. Z1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 1 There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s. Figure A.2 presents a Zone Selective Interlocking connection diagram for a system with two main breakers from incoming sources and a bus tie breaker. Note the blocking diode 01 is needed so that the feeder breakers can send interlocking signals to both the main and tie breakers, without having the tie breaker send itself an interlocking signal.

76 Page 16 Fig. A. 1 f Q) 2i 1 N t N Q) c 2 0 N t Fig. A.2 "' Q) c: 0 N 3 l.l Notes: A1 : Wiring to be twisted pair of AWG No. 14 to AWG No. 20. I Route Zone Interlocking wiring sepa A ) Main Z1 rate from power conductors. DO NOT GROUND any Zone Interlock Wiring A ) 200 A ) 0.5 Sec 1200 A Feeder 0.3 Sec 400 A Branch 0.1 Sec 100 A Typical Zone Interlocking (Ground Fa ult Protection) M Sec 0.1 Sec Z2 Z3 M2 0.5 Sec F21 A2: The maximum distance between first and last zone is 250 feet (1 1 0 m). A3: A Maximum of 20 breakers may be connected in parallel in one Zone. F22 2 Legend =Common (Ungrounded) =Short Delay Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Short Delay Input Signal from Lower Level Zone =Ground Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Ground Input Signal from Lower Level Zone /cault at Location 2 F Sec 0.1 Sec 0.1 Sec Typical Zone Interlocking Connections with Two Main Breakers (M 1, M2) and a Tie Breaker (T) (Short Delay Protection)

77 I.L Page 17 NOTES

78 Page 18 I.L NOTES

79 I.L Page 19 NOTES

80 Page 20 This instruction booklet is published solely for information purposes and should not be considered all inclusive. If further information is required, you should consult Cutler-Hammer. Sale of product shown in this literature is subject to terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Cutler-Hammer Inc. selling policies or other contractual agreement between the parties. This literature is not intended to and does not enlarge or add to any such contract. The sole source governing the rights and remedies of any purchaser of this equipment is the contract between the purchaser and Cutler-Hammer Inc. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PA RTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY, OR WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, ARE MADE REGARDING THE INFORMATION, RECOMMENDAT IONS AND DESCRIPTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN. In no event will Cutler-Hammer Inc. be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damage or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment, plant or power system, cost of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities, or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the use of the information, recommendations and description contained herein. Cutler-Hammer Inc Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, U.S.A. Style No. 7829C35H03 Printed in U.S.A./CCI I.L

81 lt\111 Cutler-Hammer I.L Table of Contents Instructions for Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Page 1.0 General Description Protection Information Testing UL Listed Devices Principle of Operation General Trip and Operation Indicators Test Provisions DIScriminator (Making Current Release) OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) Zone Interlocking Protection Settings General Long Delay Current Settings Long Delay Time Settings Short Delay Current Settings Short Delay Time Settings Instantaneous Current Settings NO Instantaneous Current Settings Ground Fault Current Settings Ground Fault Time Delay Settings Test Procedure General When To Test Test Provision Conducting Tests Control Power Not Tripping the Breaker Tripping the Breaker Battery (Inside the Rating Plug) General Battery Check Battery Replacement Auxiliary Power Module Frame Ratings, (where applicable, Sensor Ratings) and Rating Plugs References Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies Type OS Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers Series CY4 R-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Appendix A Zone Interlocking - Example , Supersedes I.L A dated September 1994 A WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL OR PERFORM MAIN TENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENERGIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT NO VOLTAGE IS PRESENT BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE TASK, AND ALWAYS FOLLOW GENERALLY ACCEPTED SAFETY PROCEDURES. CUTLER-HAMMER IS NOT LIABLE FOR THE MISAPPLICATION OR MISINSTAL LATION OF ITS PRODUCTS. It is strongly urged that the user observe all recommendations, warnings and cautions relating to the safety of personnel and equipment, as well as general and local health and safety laws, codes, and procedures. The recommendations and information contained herein are based on experience and judgment, but should not be considered to be all-inclusive or covering every application or circumstance which may arise. If you have any questions or need further information or instructions, please contact your local representative, or the Customer Support Center for the type of circuit breaker you have: Circuit Call Send to Breaker Telephone FAX Type Number Number DS/DSL (41 2) (41 2) SPB (41 2) (41 2) Series c A-Frame (41 2) (41 2) GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.1 Protection The Digitrip RMS 51 0, illustrated in Fig. 1, is a custom application specific integrated circuit based trip unit suitable fo r use in types DS and DSL low voltage AC power circuit breakers and type SPB Systems Pow-R circuit breakers and Series c R-Frame molded case circuit breakers. The Digitrip RMS 510 provides true RMS current sensing for proper correlation with thermal characteristics of conductors and equipment. Interchangeable rating plugs are provided to establish the continuous current rating of each circuit breaker.

82 Page 2 The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is completely self-contained and when the circuit breaker is closed, requires no external control power to operate its protection systems. It operates from current signal levels and control power derived through current sensors integrally mounted in the circuit breaker. The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is available in six different types. Each trip unit may be equipped with a maximum of five phase and two ground (time-current) adjustments to meet specific application requirements. The types of protection available for each model include the following, which are illustrated in Figures 2.1 through 2.6: Protection Long Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Short Time Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/ Ground Fig. 1 Circuit Breaker Assembly Cell led's fight 'RED" to indicate cause of trip lime-current Curve for Ground Protection Types Ll* LS* LSI* LIG LSG LSIG Refer to Figure Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Model LSIG with Rating Plug I.L Note*: RMS Digitrip Type Ll, LS, and LSI trip units can be applied on 3-pole or 4-pole circuit breakers for protection of the neutral circuit, IF the circuit breaker is wired and MARKED for NEUTRAL PROTECTION. Refer to the National Electric Code for appropriate application of 4-pole breakers. 1.2 Information Light Emitting Diodes (LED's) on the face of the trip unit light "Red" to indicate the reason for an automatic trip operation. The battery in the rating plug maintains the reason for trip indication following an automatic trip operation, until the ''TRIP RESET" button is pushed. The "Green" LED in the lower right corner "blinks" to indicate the trip unit is operating normally. The battery in the rating plug is "OK" if the LED lights "Green" when the "battery check" button next to it is pushed. (See Section 6.). Note: The Digitrip RMS 510 provides all of its protection functions regardless of the status of the battery. The battery serves only to maintain the indication of the reason for automatic trip. Adjust Protection Settings for Desired values with Rotary Switches. Trip Unit Operational Status "Blinking Green''=OK

83 I.L Fig Fig. 2.2 Long Time/Instantaneous Protection (LI) Long Time/Short Time Protection (LS) Fig. 2.3 Fig. 2.4 Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Protection (LSI) Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LIG) Page 3

84 Page 4 Fig Testing Long Time/Short Time/Ground/Protection (LSG) To test the trip unit, use the integral test panel. (See Section 5.0.) 2.0 UL LISTED DEVICES Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Units are "Listed" by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Under UL File E7819, for use in types OS, DSL, SPB and Series c A-Frame circuit breakers. 3.0 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 3.1 General The Digitrip RMS 51 0 trip unit is designed for use in industrial circuit breaker environments where the ambient temperatures can range from -20 C to +85 C and rarely exceed 70 to 75 C. If, however, temperatures in the neighborhood of the trip unit do exceed this range, the trip unit performance may be degraded. In order to insure that the tripping function is not compromised due to an over-temperature condition, the Digitrip RMS 510 microcomputer chip has a built-in over-temperature protection feature, factory set to trip the breaker if the chip temperature exceeds 95 C. If over-temperature is the reason for the trip, the Long Delay Time LED will light "RED". Fig. 2.6 I.L Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LSIG) The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip unit provides three basic functions: Protection, Information and Testing. A typical trip unit and rating plug are illustrated in Fig. 1. Individual product instruction leaflets referenced in Section 9.0 illustrate typical Digitrip RMS Trip Units installed in specific breakers. The trip unit employs the Cutler-Hammer Inc. custom designed integrated circuit S RE +chip, which includes a microcomputer to perform its numeric and logic functions. The principle of operation is described by the block diagram shown in Fig. 3. In the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, all required sensing and tripping power to operate its protection function is derived from the current sensors in the circuit breaker. The secondary currents from these sensors provide the correct input information for the protection functions, as well as tripping power, whenever the circuit breaker is carrying current. These current signals develop analog voltages across the appropriate calibrating resistors including: 1) Phase currents 2) Ground current (when supplied) 3) Rating plug The resulting analog voltages are digitized by the custom designed integrated circuits.

85 I.L Page 5 Fig. 3 r I I f f f " I lf loghtedaed ) ) : _j I LOAD, LOWER I TypocaiPhase Or Ground Cill b atwn llesostor Digitrip RMS 510 Block Diagram with Breaker Interface The microcomputer, in cyclic fashion, repeatedly scans the voltage values across each calibrating resistor and enters these values into its Random Access Memory (RAM). These data are used to calculate true RMS current values, which are then repeatedly compared with the protection function settings and other operating data stored in the Read Only Memory (ROM). The software program then determines whether to initiate protection functions, including tripping the breaker through the low energy trip device (Flux Transfer Shunt Trip or Direct Trip Actuator) in the circuit breaker. 3.2 Trip and Operation Indicators The LEDs, shown in Figs. 1 and , on the face of the trip unit, light "RED" to indicate the reason for any automatic trip operation. As indicated in Figs , each LED is strategically located in the related segment of the time-current curve depicted on the face of the trip unit. The reason for trip is identified by the segment of the time-current curve where the LED is lighted "RED". Following an automatic trip operation, the back-up battery, continues to supply power to the LEDs as indicated in Figs. 3 and 6. To check the status of the battery, see Section 6. Push the ''Trip Reset" button shown in Fig. 1, to turn "Off" the LEDs following a trip operation. A green colored LED, as shown in Fig. 1, indicates the operational status of the trip unit. Once the load current through the circuit breaker exceeds approximately 10% of the frame/current sensor rating, the green LED will flash "On" and "Off" once each second, to indicate the trip unit is energized and operating properly. Note: If the LED is steadily "GREEN", i.e. not flashing, the trip unit is not ready. lnd cate c use QfTRIPiLocated On ron! Po nell SeeSew"n 1 2 L Integrated Circuit SJ.!.RE+ TM Chip 3.3 Test Provisions (See Section 5.0) n: s::.; ';,':i fp,c l.7,. no SeeSectoon DIScriminator (Making Current Release) (For Types LS and LSG trip units only.) Tnp Unot Oper&T>ng Stalu< Ec orn. : gki s.. e sec\oon 32 When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous protection setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, a making current release (or DIScriminator) circuit is provided. This circuit will prevent the circuit breaker from being closed and latched-in on a faulted circuit. The non-adjustable release is pre-set at eleven (1 1) times the installed rating plug current (In) The making current release is enabled only for the first ten (1 0) cycles following an initial circuit breaker closing operation, provided the load current exceeds approximately 10% of the circuit breaker frame (or current sensor) rating. Should the load current through the circuit breaker drop to less than the 10% value, the release will reset. The release, once reset, will remain enabled until the load current passing through the circuit breaker has exceeded the 10% value for 10 cycles. The making current release will trip the circuit breaker instantaneously. In the event the breaker is intended to close (but not to trip out again) into a circuit whose current could initially be higher than 11 x In, it is possible to make the DIScriminator inactive. If the breaker does close onto a fully rated fault current, when the DIScriminator is inactive, the breaker will wait for the full short-time delay setting before it trips. The DIScriminator (making current release) can be made inactive by turning the "OVERRIDE/" setting switch (nearest the bottom edge of the trip unit) from the "DIS" position, to the "[BLANK]" position. (See Figs. 2.2 and 2.5.)

86 Page S Notes: 1 This switch has eight (8) positions, and seven (7) of them show "DIS" in the window, while ONLY ONE position shows "[BLANK]". 2 When the "OVERRIDE/" window shows "[BLANK]", the only fast-acting high short-circuit protection available is the OVERRIDE [Fixed Instantaneous]. (See 3.5 below.) 3.5 OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) (For Types LS And LSG Trip Units Only) When the Digitrip RMS 51 0 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, the Fixed Instantaneous "Override" analog trip circuit is automatically pre-set to a value no greater than the short-time withstand current rating of the circuit breaker in which the trip unit is installed. Since the specific values vary fo r different circuit breaker types and ratings, refer to time-current curves, listed in Section 9, for the values applicable to your breaker. If breaker trips due to high instantaneous current, the "OVERRIDE" LED will light "RED". 3.6 Zone Interlocking Zone Selective Interlocking (or Zone Interlocking) is available (see Fig. 3) for Digitrip RMS Trip Units having Short Delay and/or Ground Fault protection. Zone Selective Interlocking provides the fastest possible tripping for faults within the breaker's zone of protection, and yet also provides positive coordination among all breakers in the system (mains, ties, feeders and downstream breakers) to limit the outage to the affected part of the system only. When Zone Interlocking is enabled, a fault within the breaker's zone of protection will cause the RMS DIG ITRIP trip unit to: a) Trip the affected breaker instantaneously, and at the same time b) Send a signal to upstream RMS DIGITRIP trip units to restrain from tripping immediately. The restraining signal causes the upstream breakers to follow their set coordination times, so that only the minimum service is disrupted, while the fault is cleared in the shortest time possible. (This signal requires only a single pair of wires from the output terminals of the downstream breaker's trip unit to the input terminals of the upstream breaker's trip unit. For specific instructions see the applicable connection diagrams for your breaker listed in Section 9.0.) I.L Note: If a breaker (M) receives a Zone Interlocking signal from another breaker (F), but the fault current level is less than the trip unit setting for breaker (M), the signal from the other breaker (F) will not cause breaker (M) to trip. A CAUTION IF ZONE INTERLOCKING IS NOT TO BE USED (I.E. STANDARD TIME-DELAY COORDINATION ONLY IS INTENDED), THE ZONE INTERLOCKING TERMINALS MUST BE CONNECTED WITH JUMPER WIRES, AS SPECIFIED ON THE CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR YOUR BREAKER (SEE SECTION 9.0), SO THE TIME DELAY SETTINGS WILL PROVIDE THE INTENDED COORDINATION. For an example of how Zone Selective Interlocking may be used, See Appendix A. 4.0 PROTECTION SETTINGS 4.1 General Prior to placing circuit breaker in operation, each trip unit protection setting must be set to the values specified by the engineer responsible for the installation. The number of settings that must be made is determined by the protector model supplied as illustrated in Figs. 2.1 through 2.6. Each setting is made with a rotary switch, using a small screwdriver. The selected setting for each adjustment appears in its respective rectangular viewing window as illustrated in Fig. 1. The installed rating plug establishes the maximum continuous current rating of the circuit breaker (In) Instantaneous and ground current settings are defined in multiples of (In). To illustrate the effect of each protection curve setting, simulated Time-Current curves are pictured on the face of the trip unit. The rotary switch to make each setting is located nearest that portion of the simulated Time-Current curve it controls. Should an automatic "trip" occur (as a result of the current exceeding the pre-selected value), the LED in the appropriate segment of the simulated Time-Current curve will light "RED" indicating the reason for "trip". The available settings, along with the illustrated effect of changing the settings, are given in Figs. 4.1 through 4.7.

87 I.L Long Delay Current Setting There are eight (8) available Long Delay Settings, as illustrated in Fig Each setting, called "/;' is expressed as a multiple (ranging from.5 to 1) of the rating plug current (In). Note: "lr'' is also the basis for the Short-Delay Current Setting. (See Section 4.4.) Fig Long Delay Current Settings 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting,, Available Settings.5,.6,.7,.8,.85,.9,.95, 1 In Multiples of Rating Plug Amperes (10) There are eight (8) available Long Delay Time Settings, as illustrated in Fig. 4.2, ranging from 2 to 24 seconds. These settings are the total clearing times when the current value equals six (6) times 1,. Fig. 4.2 Notes: Long Delay Time Settings Available Settings , 15, 20, 24 Seconds at 6 Times Long Delay Setting (I,J 1) In addition to the standard Long Delay Protection Element, the Digitrip RMS 510 trip unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. If a breaker is reclosed soon after a Long Delay Trip, and the current again exceeds the Long Delay Setting, 1, the LTM automatically reduces the time to trip, to Page 7 allow for the fact that the load circuit temperature is already higher than normal, due to the prior overload condition. Each time an overload condition is repeated, the LTM causes the breaker to trip in a time progressively earlier than the "Long Delay Time Setting". When the load current returns to normal, the LTM begins to reset; and after about 10 minutes it has reset fully, so that next Long Delay trip time will again be the "Setting" value. In certain applications it may be desirable to disable the LTM function. The LTM function can be disabled by (first opening the breaker and then) removing the Rating Plug (See Figures 1 and 6), and lastly moving the LTM jumper (inside the rating plug cavity, See figure 4.2.1) to its "INAC TIVE" connection. (You can enable the LTM function again any time you wish by moving the LTM jumper back to its original "ACTIVE" connection.) Standard from Factory "L TM Active" ---' "L TM Inactive" -- Fig Long Time Memory "LTM" Jumper The action of the LTM is a factor to consider in performing multiple Long Delay Time tests. (See Section 5.4.) 2) There is a condition under which the Long Delay Trip LED can erroneously indicate a LOT has occurred, even though the breaker is still closed. This can happen when an overload current momentarily exceeds the Long Delay Current Setting, 1, so that the Long Delay LED flashes "RED" to indicate the overload condition. Then if, at the very moment when the LED is "ON", the load current would then suddenly drop to a value less than 10% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating, the trip unit stops functioning while the "4bit Latch Chip" (See Fig. 3) is set and the LED remains Lighted. If the current would again increase to a value above the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, and then return to normal, the

88 Page S LOT will reset itself. You can of course, manually clear the LOT (or any other trip indication) at any time, by pushing the "PUSH to RESET" button. (See Figure 1.) 4.4 Short Delay Current Setting There are eight (8) available Short Delay Current Settings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times 1, and the other two settings are "S1" or "S2" times 1,. (REMEMBER: l, is the Long Delay Current Setting). The values that "S1" and "S2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label {see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section Short Delay Time Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.4, there are two different Short Delay curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2 t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2 t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the short delay current range than will the flat response. ', '" f-..,., Available Settings " Short Delay 2, 2.5, 3, 4. 'U.d'=" Setting 5, 6, S,, S, Fig. 4.3 C '... 1l,1 to?-:::-3 \ e I J 1 L t 7 = ) 51 and 52 Values are Specified on Rating Plug Short Delay Current Settings M"l<lpiM ol Long Delay Setting Five flat (.1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2 t (.1*,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2 t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the viewing window. The 1 2 t response is applicable to currents less than eight (8) times 1,, the Long Delay Setting. For currents greater than 8 times 1,, the 1 2 t response reverts to the flat response. Note: See also Section 3.6, Zone Interlocking, above. 4.6 Instantaneous Current Setting There are eight (8) available Instantaneous Current Settings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times (In) the rating plug value, and the I.L other two settings are "M 1" or "M2" times {In). The values that "M1" and "M2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section NO Instantaneous Current Setting For types LS and LSG trip units, please see Sections 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) and 3.5 OVER RIDE (Fixed Instantaneous), for available fast-acting high short-circuit protection. 4.8 Ground Fault Current Setting The eight (8) Ground Fault Current Settings are labeled with the code letters "A" through "K" (except there are no "G" or "I" settings), as illustrated in Fig In general, the specific current settings range from 0.25 to 1.0 times (In), the rating plug value, but cannot exceed 1200 A. The specific Ground Current Settings for each letter are listed in Table 1 and on the applicable Time-Current curve for the breaker. Fig. 4.4 Sho. Delay Time 8] Sec. 0 I fj (. '. ' T-] ill I ' "-J I '-, ',...,,1 "'-.3 1"1 I I w "*"In Viewing Window r") Indicates 1 1 Ft Shape 8 X lr w Short Delay Time Settings.1,.2,.3,..5 Seconds w1 h Flat Respon' e l't Shape Returns to Flat Response at CurrE 1ts Higher than 8 x 1,.1*,.3*,.5* Seconds with Ft Shape

89 .c om I.L Page 9 r-, i"""l r-i I I L ill / J [B x l n Setting lnst. M1 and Fig. 4.5 (S) M2 Values I I I I cl II TABLE 1 - GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS (AMPERES)<D 'J"" I n M u lt i ples of Rating Pl u g Amperes O n ) I en c are Specified on Rating Plug UJ a: UJ a_ Instantaneous Current Settings :2: ::s (!) :::> -' a_ (!) z a: Cl UJ -' -' en D c F E H K / tm Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Espe cially when the single phase current is low, without the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. B A , 3, 4, 5, 6, M,, M, : --\ - _\ I_ s ua ls 1 l1 Ava i l a b le Sett i n g an r-" <D Tolerances on settings are ± 1 0% of values Refer to Type DS, type SPB or Series C R-Frame supplemental instruction leaflets given in Section 9 for list of available rating plugs for each type circuit breaker m w ww Specific Values Given on Circuit Breaker Time-Current Curve a n d in Tab l e 1 Ground Fault Current Settings.E Fig. 4.6 [01 lec A. B. C. D. E. F. H. K tri e x ln Available Sett i n g s ca Gnd-Fault Setting lp ar 5000 Effective May Ground Fault Time Delay Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.7, there are two different G round Fault curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the ground fault cur rent range than will the flat response. Five flat (. 1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 12t (. 1 *,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the setting viewing window. The 1 2t response is applicable to currents less than times the ampere rating of the installed rating plug (In) For currents greater than x In the 1 2t response reverts to the flat response.

90 Page 10 Fig '""""' I I I I \ \ \\ Gnd Fault, Time \ ITJ Sec. 0 1 : I Available Settings : \ ]. 1. 2,.3,.4,.s Seconds with Flat Response I \... _ I 1 l_ - _I : _1 :: I l't I 1 Shape / Returns to Flat Response at Approximately I 0 --1] n I l ' ---1 I l :.. ' ' f.. I Seconds with "*"In Viewing Window ' -.. '' I l't Shape Indicates ', , l't Shape ' - --_I.1*,.3*,.5* Ground Fa ult Time Delay Settings Note: See also Section 3.6 on Zone Interlocking. 5.0 TEST PROCEDURES 5.1 General A DANGER DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL, TEST OR PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENER GIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. DE-ENERGIZE THE CIRCUIT AND DISCONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTE NANCE OR TESTS. As illustrated in Figs. 1 and 5, an integral test panel is provided to test the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. Several no-trip settings are provided to check the trip unit operation without actually tripping the circuit breaker. Fig. 5 Breaker Trips At 6T and GFT Test Amps GIJ1l x In z Test 0 Trip 0 Reset Unit 0 Status I.L Available "Test Amps" Settings CD "6T" =Phase Current Test at 6xln and TRIPS breaker; "1, 2, 3, 8 or 10" xi =Phase Current Test NO reaker TRIP; "GFT" =Ground Current Test and TRIPS breaker; "GF" =Ground Current Test - NO breaker TRIP. See Section for inservice test trip limitations. Push, then release Trip Reset button to reset Trip Unit. Required following all automatic trip and test operations. Push, then release Test button to test. Test operation begins with release of pushbutton. Integral Test Panel (Lower Right Corner of Trip Unit) A CAUTION TESTING A CIRCUIT BREAKER UNDER "TRIP CON DITIONS" WHILE IT IS IN SERVICE AND CARRYING LOAD CURRENT, WHETHER DONE BY INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL MEANS, IS NOT RECOMMENDED. ANY TRIPPING OPERATION WILL CAUSE DISRUP TION OF SERVICE AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM UNNECESSARY SWITCH ING OF CONNECTED EQUIPMENT. TESTING OF A CIRCUIT BREAKER THAT RESULTS IN THE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE DONE ONLY WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN THE "TEST" OR "DISCONNECTED" CELL POSITIONS OR WHILE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS ON A TEST BENCH. To preserve the primary protection function of the trip unit, all in-service testing under 'Trip" or "No-Trip" conditions are only performed at load current values no greater than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,. Any attempt to conduct in-service testing when the load current exceeds 50% of 1,, will not be executed by the trip unit. Since the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is completely selfpowered using energy derived from the current sensors installed in the circuit breaker, all in-service tests conducted should be conducted with the auxiliary control power module, shown in Fig. 7, plugged into the trip unit. This action will avoid difficulties caused by load current levels that are too low to operate the trip unit. '

91 I.L When To Test Tests can be conducted with the breaker in the "connected" cell position while carrying load current. However, as stated in the caution note in Section 5.1, good practice will limit circuit breaker in-service "trip tests", where required, to maintenance periods during times of minimum load conditions. Testing, prior to start-up can best be accomplished with the breaker out of its cell or in the ''Test", "Disconnected" or "Withdrawn" (or Removed) cell positions. Note: Since time-current settings are based on desired system coordination and protection schemes, the protection settings selected and preset in accordance with Section 4.0 above should not be altered during or as a part of any routine test sequence. 5.3 Test Provision As indicated in Fig. 5, six different ''Test Amps" settings (1, 2, 3, 6T, 8 and 1 OX In) are available for testing the phase elements of the trip unit, and two (GF, GFT) are provided for testing the ground elements. A CAUTION A SETTING OF EITHER 6T OR GFT WILL TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. (SEE SECTION BELOW.) For any combination of the phase protection settings, an appropriate "No Trip" condition can be set to test the long time, short time and instantaneous trip settings without tripping the circuit breaker. In the "GF" test position, the level of test current based on In, is adequate to demonstrate the operating condition of the trip unit without tripping the circuit breaker. This is a functional check only, not a calibration. 5.4 Conducting Tests 1) Before starting any test sequence, check the Unit Status (Green LED) in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) to be sure it is blinking on and off about once each second, which indicates that the trip unit is functioning normally. In the event the Unit Status LED is not blinking, install an Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7), or if you have one already, check to see that it is connected correctly. 2) If the circuit breaker is carrying current, check for the following conditions: Page 11 a) the current is not less than 1 0% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating; be sure the "GREEN" Unit Status LED (in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) is blinking on and off (indicating that there is enough current flowing to provide the power necessary to operate the trip unit). In the event the Unit Status LED is either lighted "GREEN" or "OFF" continuously, there is NOT enough current flowing to power the trip unit; and an APM (See Fig. 7) should be installed before proceeding with the test. and b) the current is not more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting (1,) ; because the trip unit will not execute your test instructions when it senses that the current through the breaker exceeds the 50% level. 3) When performing tests on the Long Delay element, be aware that in addition to the standard protection element, the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. {See NOTE 1 under Section 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting.) The action of the LTM will have the same effect of advancing the Long Delay Trip Time if multiple Long Delay Time tests are performed repeatedly - as one might do in making single phase tests on each pole of a breaker in succession, for example. If you have sufficient experience in performing tests with this kind of accelerated trip timing, you may be comfortable with the results of tests performed in quick succession. However, if there is any question, you may simply wait about ten (10) minutes after a Long Delay Trip for the LTM to reset, before you check the next pole Control Power For testing the trip unit, an optional Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) as shown in Fig. 7 is recommended. This Auxiliary Power Module, which operates from a separate 120 Vac supply, may be used when a drawout circuit breaker is in any of its four cell positions, i.e., "Connected", ''Test", "Disconnected" and "Withdrawn" (or "Removed.") Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without

92 Page 12 the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well-above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Plug in the Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) to insure control power is available for testing. When the APM is properly connected the "GREEN" Unit Status LED will blink on and off about once per second Not Tripping the Breaker 1. Place the ''Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the six "No Trip" test settings, i.e., 1, 2, 3, 8, or 10, x In, or GF. 2. Depress the (Black) ''Test" pushbutton and release it - the test starts when the pushbutton is released. 3. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected "No Trip" test value, then the LED related to that function will turn on signifying successful completion of the test action. Note: During the long delay tests the Long Delay LED flashes "RED". 4. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the 'Trip Reset" pushbutton. All LEOs lighted by the "No Trip" test action should turn "OFF". Should an actual overload or fault condition occur during an in-service, "No Trip Test" sequence, the protection function will override the test function, and the circuit breaker will trip automatically in accordance with the actual Time-Current settings. Note: The "Trip Reset" pushbutton may be depressed at any time. However, should a test already be in progress, the test would be aborted. A test initiated via the integral test panel may be aborted at any time by depressing the 'Trip Resef' pushbutton Tripping the Breaker 1. Make sure that the circuit breaker is carrying no current. (See CAUTION notes under Section 5.1.) NOTE: In the event it is decided to perform a "Breaker Trip Test" while load current is flowing, make sure the circuit breaker is carrying no more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting 1,. (The I.L trip unit will not execute your instructions to Test itself, when the load current exceeds 50% of lr) 2. Place the ''Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the two ''Trip" test settings, i.e., 6T or GFT. 3. Depress the black 'Test" pushbutton (See Fig. 5) and release it - the test is initiated when the pushbutton is released. 4. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected 'Test Amps" value, the circuit breaker will trip and the LED related to that function will light "RED". 5. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the ''Trip Reset" pushbutton (See Fig. 5). All LEOs lighted by the 'Trip" test action should turn "OFF". 6.0 BATTERY (INSIDE THE RATING PLUG) 6.1 General The battery has no part in the protection function of the trip unit. As indicated in Figs. 3 and 6, the battery is provided to maintain the "RED" LED indication of the cause of TRIP in the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. The battery is located in the rating plug along with a battery check pushbutton and a green battery check LED. 6.2 Battery Check The battery is a long life, lithium photo type unit. The status of the battery can be checked at any time by depressing the battery check pushbutton and observing the "G REEN" LED as shown in Fig. 6. If the battery check LED does not light "GREEN", replace the battery. The condition of the battery has no effect on the protection function of the trip unit. Even with the battery removed, the unit will still trip the breaker in accordance with its settings. However, without the battery, the cause of TRIP LED will not be lighted "RED". If the battery is replaced (or if an Auxiliary Power Module is plugged into the trip unit), one or more of the cause of Trip LED's may be illuminated. The user should push the red "TRIP RESET" button to turn off the indications, and the trip unit will be ready to indicate the next cause of trip. 6.3 Battery Replacement The battery can be easily replaced from the front of the trip unit by lowering the hinged cover of the rating plug as shown in Fig. 6. The battery can then be removed by pulling the battery tab as shown in Fig. 6.

93 I.L Note: The battery can be replaced at any time, even while the circuit breaker is in service, without affecting the operation of the circuit breaker or its protection function. A CAUTION CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED WHEN REPLACING A BATTERY TO INSURE THAT THE CORRECT POLARITIES ARE OBSERVED. POLARITY MARK INGS ARE SHOWN ON THE RATING PLUG WHEN THE HINGED COVER IS OPEN AS INDICATED IN FIG. 6. The replacement battery should be the same type or equivalent. Acceptable 3.0 volt lithium batteries may be Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Rating f'fug is for Type OS Circuit Breakers Only Rating Plugs for R Frame and Sf'B Breakers are Similar Rating Piug ldentif!catkm "Battery Check" Pushbutton Typical Rating Plug Values for Short Delay S1 and S2!n&tantanm.:us M1 and M2 Settings Battery "OK" if LED Lights "GREEN" when "Battery Check'" Button is Pushed Trip Unit Connector {Fits into Keyed Cavity Page 13 obtained from the following companies under their type designation indicated: Company in Top Right Corner of Trip Unit. See Fig. 1) -- I J::at!WM 1mAI: l1!1111l t frwtll\11 fta f!!# thtt 011q Wrtll i'f11i' Th;it";p!IMS wrrts Auxiliary Power Module Varta Batteries, Inc. 150 Clarbrook Road Elmsford, N.Y Duracell South Broadway Tarrytown, N.Y (914) Sanyo Electric Inc. Battery Division 200 Riser Road Little Ferry, N.J Po!anty Marks Model CR 1/3N DL 1/3N CR 1/3N Sattery Removal Tab Sattery

94 Page AUXILIARY POWER MODULE The Auxiliary Power Module or APM (Cat No. PRTAAPM), illustrated in Fig. 7, is an encapsulated power supply that requires a 120 Vac input at either 50 or 60 Hz. It provides an output of 32 Vdc (nominal 40 Vdc open circuit) which can be used for testing a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. When a drawout circuit breaker is equipped with a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, it can be conveniently set and tested while the circuit breaker is out of its cell or in its cell in the 'Test", "Disconnect" or "Withdrawn" positions by using the Auxiliary Power Module. The Auxiliary Power Module is equipped with a unique plug-in connector suitable only for plugging into the keyed receptacle in the upper right corner of a Digitrip RMS Trip Unit as shown in Fig. 1. This prohibits the possible use of an incorrect type power module. 8.0 FRAME RATINGS, (WHERE APPLICABLE, SENSOR RATINGS) AND RATING PLUGS The Frame Rating of a circuit breaker is the maximum RMS current it can carry continuously. The maximum Short-Circuit Current Rating of the Circuit breaker are usually related to the Frame Rating as well. It is often times desirable to be able to choose a current value (In), less than the full frame rating, to be the basis for the coordination of the circuit breaker's protection functions, without affecting its short-circuit current capability. For the Digitrip 510 trip unit this is implemented by changing the Rating Plug (and/or Current Sensors, where applicable - See yo ur circuit breaker instructions (listed in Section 9.0 below) to determine if this applies to your circuit breaker). The (Current) Sensor Rating (where applicable) is the maximum RMS current the circuit breaker can carry with the specified current sensors installed. The Sensor Rating can be the same or less than the Frame Rating, but not greater. The Rating Plug (See Fig. 6) fits into a special cavity to complete the trip unit (See Fig. 1 ). Rating plugs have two current ratings listed on their covers (See Fig. 6): 1) the "Must be used with Frame Rated" cur- I.L rent value (or "Sensor Rated", if applicable), and 2) "'In (Rated I) =" current value. This latter value, (In) is the basis for the trip unit current settings: 1) The Instantaneous and Ground Current Settings (if provided) are multiples of (In) (See Sections 4.6 and 4.8) 2) The Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, is a multiple of (In) Long Delay Current Setting = 1, = LD x (In). (See Section 4.2) 3) The Short Delay Current Setting (if provided) is indirectly dependent upon (In), because it is a multiple of 1,, which in turn is a multiple of (In). Short Delay Current Setting = SD x 1, (See Section 4.4) = SD X LD X (In). Rating Plugs for the Digitrip RMS 51 0 trip units are marked for and may be applied on both 50 and 60 Hz systems. A CAUTION BEFORE YOU FIT THE RA TING PLUG INTO THE TRIP UNIT, BE SURE TO CHECK THAT THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RA TING IF APPLICABLE), MA TCH THOSE PRINTED ON THE RA TING PLUG COVER. INSTALLING A RA TING PLUG THA T DOES NOT MA TCH THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RATING, IF APPLICA BLE}, CAN PRODUCE SERIOUS MISCOORDINA TION AND/OR FA ILURE OF THE PROTECTION SYSTEM. Complete catalog descriptions of all available rating plugs are given in the applicable circuit breaker supplementary instruction leaflets. (See Section 9) Note: Rating plugs from Digitrip models 500/SOOnOO/ 800 CAN NOT be used with model 510 trip units. The connection pins are located in different positions, so that one cannot accidentally use the incorrect kind of plug.

95 I.L REFERENCES 9.1 Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies I.L I.L I.L Instructions for Digitrip RMS 51 0 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip RMS 610 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip RMS 810 Trip Unit 9.2 Type DS Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers I.B I.B AD SC SC SC B508 Instructions for Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Types DS and DSL Supplement B to Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Types DS and DSL Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Connection Diagram for Type DS Circuit Breakers 9.3 Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers I.L I.L AD SC SC SC I.S Instruction for the Systems Pow-R Breaker and Drawout Mechanism Supplementary Instructions for the Systems Pow-R Breaker used with the Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breaker Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) SPB Master Connection Diagram 9.4 Series c; A-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers 29C106 29C107 29C713 AD R SC SC SC Frame Book Frame Instruction Leaflet Supplementary Instructions for Series c R-Frame used with the Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for R-Frame Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Page 15 I.L. 29C714 Master Connection Diagram for Series c R-Frame Circuit Breaker APPENDIX A ZONE INTERLOCKING Assume a ground fault of 2000 Amperes occurs and refer to Fig A.1. CASE 1 : There is no Zone Selective Interlocking. (standard time delay coordination is used) &.ult.3 The branch breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.1 s. Fault 2 The feeder breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.3 s. Fault 1 The breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.5 s. CASE 2: There is Zone Selective Interlocking Fault 3 The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault and Z3 will send an interlocking signal to the Z2 trip unit; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to Z1. Z1 and Z2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the branch breaker Z3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker Z2 will clear the fault in 0.3 s (as above). Similarly, in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 2 The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to the Z1 trip unit. Z1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 1 There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s. Figure A.2 presents a Zone Selective Interlocking connection diagram for a system with two main breakers from incoming sources and a bus tie breaker. Note the blocking diode 01 is needed so that the feeder breakers can send interlocking signals to both the main and tie breakers, without having the tie breaker send itself an interlocking signal.

96 Page 16 Fig. A 1 t 3200 A ) Q) 1600 A 5 ) 1 N ' t Fig. A.2 "' Q) c: 2 0 N +-"' Q) c: 0 N A I ) Main 0.5 Sec 1200 A Feeder 0.3 Sec 400 A Branch 0.1 Sec 100 A Typical Zone Interlocking (Ground Fault Protection) F Sec M1 0.5 Sec F Sec 1 N4004 D1 Z1 Z2 Z3 0.3 Sec Notes: A1 : M2 0.5 Sec F21 A2: I.L Wiring to be twisted pair of AWG No. 14 to AWG No. 20. Route Zone Interlocking wiring separate from power conductors. DO NOT GROUND any Zone Interlock Wiring. The maximum distance between first and last zone is 250 feet (1 1 0 m). A3: A Maximum of 20 breakers may be connected in parallel in one Zone. F Sec 0.1 Sec 2 Legend ; Common (Ungrounded) ; Short Delay Output Signal to Higher Level Zone ; Short Delay Input Signal from Lower Level Zone =Ground Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Ground Input Signal from Lower Level Zone />ault at Location 2 Typical Zone Interlocking Connections with Two Main Breakers (M 1, M2) and a Tie Breaker (T) (Short Delay Protection) IF!y- N F Sec

97 I.L Page 17 NOTES

98 Page 18 I.L NOTES

99 I.L Page 19 NOTES

100 Page 20 This instruction booklet is published solely for information purposes and should not be considered all inclusive. If further information is required, you should consult Cutler-Hammer. Sale of product shown in this literature is subject to terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Cutler-Hammer Inc. selling policies or other contractual agreement between the parties. This literature is not intended to and does not enlarge or add to any such contract. The sole source governing the rights and remedies of any purchaser of this equipment is the contract between the purchaser and Cutler-Hammer Inc. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY, OR WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, ARE MADE REGARDING THE INFORMATION, RECOMMENDATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN. In no event will Cutler-Hammer Inc. be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damage or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment, plant or power system, cost of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities, or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the use of the information, recommendations and description contained herein. Cutler-Hammer Inc Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, U.S.A. Style No. 7829C35H03 Printed in U.S.A./CCI I.L

101 ICcJU Cutler-Hammer I.L Table of Contents Instructions for Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Page 1.0 General Description Protection Information... 2 Testing UL Listed Devices Principle of Operation General Trip and Operation Indicators Test Provisions DIScriminator (Making Current Release) OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) Zone Interlocking Protection Settings General Long Delay Current Settings Long Delay Time Settings Short Delay Current Settings Short Delay Time Settings Instantaneous Current Settings NO Instantaneous Current Settings Ground Fault Current Settings... 8 Ground Fault Time Delay Settings Test Procedure General When To Test Test Provision Conducting Tests Control Power Not Tripping the Breaker Tripping the Breaker Battery (Inside the Rating Plug) General Battery Check Battery Replacement Auxiliary Power Module Frame Ratings, (where applicable, Sensor Ratings) and Rating Plugs References Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies Type DS Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers Series C% R-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Appendix A Zone Interlocking - Example , Supersedes I.L A dated September 1994 A WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL OR PERFORM MAIN TENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENERGIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT NO VOLTAGE IS PRESENT BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE TASK, AND ALWAYS FOLLOW GENERALLY ACCEPTED SAFETY PROCEDURES. CUTLER-HAMMER IS NOT LIABLE FOR THE MISAPPLICATION OR MISINSTAL LATION OF ITS PRODUCTS. It is strongly urged that the user observe all recommendations, warnings and cautions relating to the safety of personnel and equipment, as well as general and local health and safety laws, codes, and procedures. The recommendations and information contained herein are based on experience and judgment, but should not be considered to be all-inclusive or covering every application or circumstance which may arise. If you have any questions or need further information or instructions, please contact your local representative, or the Customer Support Center for the type of circuit breaker you have: Circuit Call Send to Breaker Telephone FAX Type Number Number DS/DSL (412) (412) SPB (412) (412) Series c R-Frame (412) (412) GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.1 Protection The Digitrip RMS 51 0, illustrated in Fig. 1, is a custom application specific integrated circuit based trip unit suitable for use in types DS and DSL low voltage AC power circuit breakers and type SPB Systems Pow-R circuit breakers and Series c R-Frame molded case circuit breakers. The Digitrip RMS 510 provides true RMS current sensing fo r proper correlation with thermal characteristics of conductors and equipment. Interchangeable rating plugs are provided to establish the continuous current rating of each circuit breaker.

102 Page 2 The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is completely self-contained and when the circuit breaker is closed, requires no external control power to operate its protection systems. It operates from current signal levels and control power derived through current sensors integrally mounted in the circuit breaker. The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is available in six different types. Each trip unit may be equipped with a maximum of five phase and two ground (time-current) adjustments to meet specific application requirements. The types of protection available for each model include the following, which are illustrated in Figures 2.1 through 2.6: Protection Long Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Short Time Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/ Ground Fig. 1 Circuit Breaker Assembly Cell Location Reference LED's light "RED" to indicate cause of trip Time-Current Curve.,, for Phase Protection lime-current Curve for Ground Protection Types Ll* LS* LSI* LIG LSG LSIG Refer to Figure Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Model LSIG with Rating Plug I.L Note*: RMS Digitrip Type Ll, LS, and LSI trip units can be applied on 3-pole or 4-pole circuit breakers for protection of the neutral circuit, IF the circuit breaker is wired and MARKED for NEUTRA L PROTECTION. Refer to the National Electric Code for appropriate application of 4-pole breakers. 1.2 Information Light Emitting Diodes (LED's) on the face of the trip unit light "Red" to indicate the reason for an automatic trip operation. The battery in the rating plug maintains the reason for trip indication following an automatic trip operation, until the 'TRIP RESET" button is pushed. The "Green" LED in the lower right corner "blinks" to indicate the trip unit is operating normally. The battery in the rating plug is "OK" if the LED lights "Green" when the "battery check" button next to it is pushed. (See Section 6.). Note: The Digitrip RMS 510 provides all of its protection functions regardless of the status of the battery. The battery serves only to maintain the indication of the reason for automatic trip. "Trip Unit / Operational Status "Blinking Green''=OK Adjust Protection Settings for Desired Values With Rotary Switches

103 I.L Fig Fig. 2.2 Long Time/Instantaneous Protection (LI) Long Time/Short Time Protection (LS) Fig. 2.3 Fig Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Protection (LSI) Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LIG) Page 3

104 Page 4 Fig Testing Long Time/Short Time/Ground/Protection (LSG) To test the trip unit, use the integral test panel. (See Section 5.0.) 2.0 UL LISTED DEVICES Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Units are "Listed" by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Under UL File E7819, for use in types DS, DSL, SPB and Series (; A-Frame circuit breakers. 3.0 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 3.1 General The Digitrip RMS 510 trip unit is designed for use in industrial circuit breaker environments where the ambient temperatures can range from -20 C to +85 C and rarely exceed 70 to 75 C. If, however, temperatures in the neighborhood of the trip unit do exceed this range, the trip unit performance may be degraded. In order to insure that the tripping function is not compromised due to an over-temperature condition, the Digit rip RMS 510 microcomputer chip has a built-in over-temperature protection feature, factory set to trip the breaker if the chip temperature exceeds 95 C. If over-temperature is the reason for the trip, the Long Delay Time LED will light "RED". Fig. 2.6 I.L Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LS/G) The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip unit provides three basic functions: Protection, Information and Testing. A typical trip unit and rating plug are illustrated in Fig. 1. Individual product instruction leaflets referenced in Section 9.0 illustrate typical Digitrip RMS Trip Units installed in specific breakers. The trip unit employs the Cutler-Hammer Inc. custom designed integrated circuit S11RE + chip, which includes a microcomputer to perform its numeric and logic functions. The principle of operation is described by the block diagram shown in Fig. 3. In the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, all required sensing and tripping power to operate its protection function is derived from the current sensors in the circuit breaker. The secondary currents from these sensors provide the correct input information for the protection functions, as well as tripping power, whenever the circuit breaker is carrying current. These current signals develop analog voltages across the appropriate calibrating resistors including: 1) Phase currents 2) Ground current (when supplied) 3) Rating plug The resulting analog voltages are digitized by the custom designed integrated circuits.

105 I I.L eesewone Fig. 3 A B C N I,t,t,t " I t t t " I ) ) ) J I LOAO, LOWER I r Typi<:JI I'hallft Or Ground Calobrall<>n A!!St5tor, == --{ T r l 7, :, u l 1 :, ;:;.!'u e I See Sec10<> ; : J Digitrip RMS 510 Block Diagram with Breaker Interface The microcomputer, in cyclic fashion, repeatedly scans the voltage values across each calibrating resistor and enters these values into its Random Access Memory (RAM). These data are used to calculate true RMS current values, which are then repeatedly compared with the protection function settings and other operating data stored in the Read Only Memory (ROM). The software program then determines whether to initiate protection functions, including tripping the breaker through the low energy trip device (Flux Transfer Shunt Trip or Direct Trip Actuator) in the circuit breaker. 3.2 Trip and Operation Indicators The LEOs, shown in Figs. 1 and , on the face of the trip unit, light "RED" to indicate the reason for any automatic trip operation. As indicated in Figs , each LED is strategically located in the related segment of the time-current curve depicted on the face of the trip unit The reason for trip is identified by the segment of the time-current curve where the LED is lighted "RED". Following an automatic trip operation, the back-up battery, continues to supply power to the LEOs as indicated in Figs. 3 and 6. To check the status of the battery, see Section 6. Push the "Trip Reset" button shown in Fig. 1, to turn "Off" the LEDs following a trip operation. A green colored LED, as shown in Fig. 1, indicates the operational status of the trip unit Once the load current through the circuit breaker exceeds approximately 10% of the frame/current sensor rating, the green LED will flash "On" and "Off" once each second, to indicate the trip unit is energized and operating properly. Note: If the LED is steadily "GREEN", i.e. not flashing, the trip unit is not ready. OITAtP tlocated On FroN Panel' See S.. cuon t2 Flu Transle< Shun! Troo ifts TI O recr lflp A IC ator total Integrated Circuit 5-tRE+ TM Chip 3.3 Test Provisions (See Section 5.0) "v" S!:.;, : ':,rl FP c ; on11 See Sectoon4 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) (For Types LS and LSG trip units only.) TT<pUott 0J>ft1BIIng 51<'1U EcE' "'f,',':: Kt s-s.. ctoon3.1 Page S When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous protection setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, a making current release (or DIScriminator) circuit is provided. This circuit will prevent the circuit breaker from being closed and latched-in on a faulted circuit The non-adjustable release is pre-set at eleven (1 1) times the installed rating plug current (ln)- The making current release is enabled only for the first ten (10) cycles following an initial circuit breaker closing operation, provided the load current exceeds approximately 10% of the circuit breaker frame (or current sensor) rating. Should the load current through the circuit breaker drop to less than the 1 0% value, the release will reset The release, once reset, will remain enabled until the load current passing through the circuit breaker has exceeded the 10% value for 10 cycles. The making current release will trip the circuit breaker instantaneously. In the event the breaker is intended to close (but not to trip out again) into a circuit whose current could initially be higher than 11 x In, it is possible to make the DIScriminator inactive. If the breaker does close onto a fully rated fault current, when the DIScriminator is inactive, the breaker will wait for the full short-time delay setting before it trips. The DIScriminator (making current release) can be made inactive by turning the "OVERRIDE/" setting switch (nearest the bottom edge of the trip unit) from the "DIS" position, to the "[BLANK]" position. (See Figs. 2.2 and 2.5.)

106 Page 6 Notes: 1 This switch has eight (8) positions, and seven (7) of them show "DIS" in the window, while ONLY ONE position shows "[BLANK]". 2 When the "OVERRIDE/" window shows "[BLANK]", the only fast-acting high short-circuit protection available is the OVERRIDE [Fixed Instantaneous]. (See 3.5 below.) 3.5 OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) (For Types LS And LSG Trip Units Only) When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, the Fixed Instantaneous "Override" analog trip circuit is automatically pre-set to a value no greater than the short-time withstand current rating of the circuit breaker in which the trip unit is installed. Since the specific values vary for different circuit breaker types and ratings, refer to time-current curves, listed in Section 9, for the values applicable to your breaker. If breaker trips due to high instantaneous current, the "OVERRIDE" LED will light "RED". 3.6 Zone Interlocking Zone Selective Interlocking (or Zone Interlocking) is available (see Fig. 3) for Digitrip RMS Trip Units having Short Delay and/or Ground Fault protection. Zone Selective Interlocking provides the fastest possible tripping for faults within the breaker's zone of protection, and yet also provides positive coordination among all breakers in the system (mains, ties, feeders and downstream breakers) to limit the outage to the affected part of the system only. When Zone Interlocking is enabled, a fault within the breaker's zone of protection will cause the RMS DIG ITRIP trip unit to: a) Trip the affected breaker instantaneously, and at the same time b) Send a signal to upstream RMS DIGITRIP trip units to restrain from tripping immediately. The restraining signal causes the upstream breakers to follow their set coordination times, so that only the minimum service is disrupted, while the fault is cleared in the shortest time possible. (This signal requires only a single pair of wires from the output terminals of the downstream breaker's trip unit to the input terminals of the upstream breaker's trip unit. For specific instructions see the applicable connection diagrams for your breaker listed in Section 9.0.) I.L Note: If a breaker (M) receives a Zone Interlocking signal from another breaker (F), but the fault current level is less than the trip unit setting for breaker (M), the signal from the other breaker (F) will not cause breaker (M) to trip. A CAUTION IF ZONE INTERLOCKING IS NOT TO BE USED (I.E. STANDARD TIME-DELAY COORDINATION ONLY IS INTENDED), THE ZONE INTERLOCKING TERMINALS MUST BE CONNECTED WITH JUMPER WIRES, AS SPECIFIED ON THE CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR YOUR BREAKER (SEE SECTION 9.0), SO THE TIME DELAY SETTINGS WILL PROVIDE THE INTENDED COORDINATION. For an example of how Zone Selective Interlocking may be used, See Appendix A. 4.0 PROTECTION SETTINGS 4.1 General Prior to placing circuit breaker in operation, each trip unit protection setting must be set to the values specified by the engineer responsible for the installation. The number of settings that must be made is determined by the protector model supplied as illustrated in Figs. 2.1 through 2.6. Each setting is made with a rotary switch, using a small screwdriver. The selected setting for each adjustment appears in its respective rectangular viewing window as illustrated in Fig. 1. The installed rating plug establishes the maximum continuous current rating of the circuit breaker (In) Instantaneous and ground current settings are defined in multiples of (In) To illustrate the effect of each protection curve setting, simulated Time-Current curves are pictured on the face of the trip unit. The rotary switch to make each setting is located nearest that portion of the simulated Time-Current curve it controls. Should an automatic "trip" occur (as a result of the current exceeding the pre-selected value), the LED in the appropriate segment of the simulated Time-Current curve will light "RED" indicating the reason for "trip". The available settings, along with the illustrated effect of changing the settings, are given in Figs. 4.1 through 4.7.

107 I.L Long Delay Current Setting There are eight (8} available Long Delay Settings, as illustrated in Fig Each setting, called "1/ is expressed as a multiple (ranging from.5 to 1) of the rating plug current (In) Note: "1," is also the basis for the Short-Delay Current Setting. (See Section 4.4.) Fig Long Delay Setting 1, OJx I n = 1, 0 Long Delay Current Settings 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting,, Available Settings ,.8,.85,.9,.95, 1 In Multiples of Rating Plug Amperes U n l There are eight (8} available Long Delay Time Settings, as illustrated in Fig. 4.2, ranging from 2 to 24 seconds. These settings are the total clearing times when the current value equals six (6) times 1,. Fig. 4.2 Notes: 6xl, Long Delay Time Settings Available Settings 2, 4, 7, , 15, 20, 24 Seconds at 6 Times Long Delay Setting (I,J 1) In addition to the standard Long Delay Protection Element, the Digitrip RMS 51 0 trip unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. If a breaker is reclosed soon after a Long Delay Trip, and the current again exceeds the Long Delay Setting, 1,. the LTM automatically reduces the time to trip, to Page 7 allow for the fact that the load circuit temperature is already higher than normal, due to the prior overload condition. Each time an overload condition is repeated, the LTM causes the breaker to trip in a time progressively earlier than the "Long Delay Time Setting". When the load current returns to normal, the LTM begins to reset; and after about 10 minutes it has reset fully, so that next Long Delay trip time will again be the "Setting" value. In certain applications it may be desirable to disable the LTM function. The LTM function can be disabled by (first opening the breaker and then) removing the Rating Plug (See Figures 1 and 6), and lastly moving the LTM jumper (inside the rating plug cavity, See figure 4.2.1) to its "INAC TIVE" connection. (You can enable the LTM function again any time you wish by moving the LTM jumper back to its original "ACTIVE" connection.).- Rating Plug Cavity {./}--- --_..,_ Standard from Factory "L TM Active" J Rating Plug Cavity - -- Fig Long Time Memory "LTM" Jumper 2) "L TM Inactive" -- The action of the LTM is a factor to consider in performing multiple Long Delay Time tests. (See Section 5.4.) There is a condition under which the Long Delay Trip LED can erroneously indicate a LOT has occurred, even though the breaker is still closed. This can happen when an overload current momentarily exceeds the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,. so that the Long Delay LED flashes "RED" to indicate the overload condition. Then if, at the very moment when the LED is "ON", the load current would then suddenly drop to a value less than 10% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating, the trip unit stops functioning while the "4bit Latch Chip" (See Fig. 3) is set and the LED remains Lighted. If the current would again increase to a value above the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, and then return to normal, the

108 .c om I.L Page B 4.5 Short Delay Time Setting 4.7 NO Instantaneous Current Setting For types LS and LSG trip units, please see Sections 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) and 3.5 OVER RIDE (Fixed I nstantaneous), for available fast-acting high short-circuit protection. 4.8 Ground Fault Current Setting The eight (8) G round Fault Current Settings are labeled with the code letters "A" through "K" (except there are no "G" or "I" settings), as ill ustrated in Fig I n general, the specific current settings range from 0.25 to 1.0 times (In), the rating plug value, but cannot exceed A. The specific G round Current Settings for each letter are listed in Table 1 and on the applicable Time-Current curve for the breaker. ar As illustrated in Fig. 4.4, there are two different Short Delay curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the short delay current range than will the flat response. ua ls There are eight (8) available Short Delay Current Set tings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times 1, and the other two settings are "51 " or "52" times 1,. (REMEMBER: l, is the Long Delay Current Setting). The values that "51 " and "52" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section 9.0. an 4.4 Short Delay Current Setting other two settings are "M1 " or "M2" times (In). The values that "M1 " and "M2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section 9.0. tm LOT will reset itself. You can of course, manually clear the LOT (or any other trip indication) at any time, by pushing the "PUSH to RESET" button. (See Figure 1.) Fig. 4.3 IIJ x 1, \ ::) -- and 52 0 Sec. 'U J'::-.. c1.,. ftl -"'::. "' In Multiples of L_- f,;; 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, S,, S, ',.. L- r,. :; 3 ca 51 Short Delay Setting Time Available Settings "),..,.... ".. 1,.2.. 3,.. 5 Seconds w1 h Flat Respon, e Values are Specified on Rating Plug tri ' ""Th" Sho.' Delay lp " {""... Short Delay Current Settings.E lec Five flat (.1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2t (. 1 *,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the viewing window. The 1 2t response is applicable to currents less than eight (8) times 1,, the Long Delay Setting. For currents greater than 8 times 1,, the 1 2t response reverts to the flat response. Note: See also Section 3.6, Zone Interlocking, above. w 4.6 Instantaneous Current Setting lj y- ] m r_... ' -, :.... I._-.,-.::. J I I '... " ] '-. "*"In Viewing Window Indicates l't Shape Fig. 4.4 I I I 8X 1 I w ('-) l't Shape Returns to Flat Response at CurrE 1ts Higher than 8 x *,.3*,.5* Seconds with 12t Shape 1""""'1 w 1 1 f, Short Delay Time Settings ww There are eight (8) available I nstantaneous Cu rrent Set tings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times (In) the rating plug value, and the Effective May 1 997

109 I.L r-, 1"""1 I'" l 1 1 I 1 l l 111 : 1 r1 I "" 1 Setting lnsl I L 1 m x l n : --\ J (S) I_ - -_\ Fig. 4.5 M1 and M2 Values are Specified on Rating Plug Instantaneous Current Settings Available Settings , 3, 4, 5, 6, M,, M, In Multiples of Rating Plug Amperes!I n ) Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Gnd-Fault Fig. 4.6 Setting m X i n e m Available Settings A, B. C, D. E. F. H. K Ground Fa ult Current Settings Specific Values Given on CirCUit Breaker Time-Current Curve and in Table 1 TABLE 1 - GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTI NGS (AMPERES)<D Page 9 A B c D E F H K BB BB 250 " fi) w a: w BO a_ B 1B B 630 ::E BOO BO BOO (!) ::J J a_ (!) B z BO BOO a: BOO Cl w..j J B ;:!: Ul 3000/ BOO <D Tolerances on settings are ±1 0% of values shown. m Refer to Type DS, type SPB or Series C A-Frame supplemental instruction leaflets given in Section 9 for list of available rating plugs for each type circuit breaker. 4.9 Ground Fault Time Delay Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.7, there are two different Ground Fault curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2 t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2 t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the ground fault current range than will the flat response. Five flat (.1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2 t (.1*,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2 t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the setting viewing window. The 1 2 t response is applicable to currents less than times the ampere rating of the installed rating plug (In). For currents greater than x In the 1 2 t response reverts to the flat response. 473

110 Page 10 Fig \ \ \ \\ Gnd Fault, Tome \ []] { 0 t"1 I I I I 1 : I] Available Settings : \ ,.4,.5 Seconds with I : - I Flat Response (-._ l- - - I \.. I :_ ::- - _ I Ft Shape 1 1 / Returns to Flat Response at I ;"> - - 1] I I _f 1 : I Approximately *,.3*,.s Seconds with " "In Viewing Window '.. ' ' I 12t Shape Indicates l't Shape '..._ - -- t.. '- --_I Ground Fa ult Time Delay Settings Note: See also Section 3.6 on Zone Interlocking. 5.0 TEST PROCEDURES 5.1 General A DANGER DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTA LL, TEST OR PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENER GIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. DE-ENERGIZE THE CIRCUIT AND DISCONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTE NANCE OR TESTS. As illustrated in Figs. 1 and 5, an integral test panel is provided to test the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. Several no-trip settings are provided to check the trip unit operation without actually tripping the circuit breaker. Fig. 5 Breaker Trips At 6T and GFT Test xln l; 0 Trip 0 Reset Unit 0 Status I.L Available "Test Amps" Settings CD "6T' =Phase Current Test at 6xln and TRIPS breaker; "1,2,3,8or10" xl =Phase Current Test NO 'breaker TRIP; "GFT" =Ground Current Test and TRIPS breaker; "GF" =Ground Current Test NO breaker TRIP. See Section for inser vice test trip limitations. Push, then release Trip Reset button to reset Trip Unit. Required following all automatic trip and test Push, then release Test button to test. Test operation begins with release of pushbutton. Integral Test Panel (Lower Right Corner of Trip Unit) A CAUTION TESTING A CIRCUIT BREAKER UNDER "TRIP CON DITIONS" WHILE IT IS IN SERVICE AND CARRYING LOAD CURRENT, WHETHER DONE BY INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL MEANS, IS NOT RECOMMENDED. ANY TRIPPING OPERATION WILL CAUSE DISRUP TION OF SERVICE AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM UNNECESSARY SWITCH ING OF CONNECTED EQUIPMENT. TESTING OF A CIRCUIT BREAKER THAT RESULTS IN THE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE DONE ONLY WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN THE "TEST" OR "DISCONNECTED" CELL POSITIONS OR WHILE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS ON A TEST BENCH. To preserve the primary protection function of the trip unit, all in-service testing under ''Trip" or "No-Trip" conditions are only performed at load current values no greater than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,. Any attempt to conduct in-service testing when the load current exceeds 50% of 1,, will not be executed by the trip unit. Since the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is completely selfpowered using energy derived from the current sensors installed in the circuit breaker, all in-service tests conducted should be conducted with the auxiliary control power module, shown in Fig. 7, plugged into the trip unit. This action will avoid difficulties caused by load current levels that are too low to operate the trip unit. '

111 I.L When To Test Tests can be conducted with the breaker in the "connected" cell position while carrying load current. However, as stated in the caution note in Section 5.1, good practice will limit circuit breaker in-service "trip tests", where required, to maintenance periods during times of minimum load conditions. Testing, prior to start-up can best be accomplished with the breaker out of its cell or in the 'Test", "Disconnected" or "Withdrawn" (or Removed) cell positions. Note: Since time-current settings are based on desired system coordination and protection schemes, the protection settings selected and preset in accordance with Section 4.0 above should not be altered during or as a part of any routine test sequence. 5.3 Test Provision As indicated in Fig. 5, six different 'Test Amps" settings (1, 2, 3, 6T, 8 and 1 OX In) are available for testing the phase elements of the trip unit, and two (GF, GFT) are provided for testing the ground elements. A CAUTION A SETTING OF EITHER 6T OR GFT WILL TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. {SEE SECTION BELOW.) For any combination of the phase protection settings, an appropriate "No Trip" condition can be set to test the long time, short time and instantaneous trip settings without tripping the circuit breaker. In the "GF" test position, the level of test current based on In, is adequate to demonstrate the operating condition of the trip unit without tripping the circuit breaker. This is a functional check only, not a calibration. 5.4 Conducting Tests 1) Before starting any test sequence, check the Unit Status (Green LED) in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) to be sure it is blinking on and off about once each second, which indicates that the trip unit is functioning normally. In the event the Unit Status LED is not blinking, install an Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7), or if you have one already, check to see that it is connected correctly. 2) If the circuit breaker is carrying current, check for the following conditions: Page 11 a) the current is not less than 1 0% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating; be sure the "GREEN" Unit Status LED (in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) is blinking on and off (indicating that there is enough current flowing to provide the power necessary to operate the trip unit). In the event the Unit Status LED is either lighted "GREEN" or "OFF" continuously, there is NOT enough current flowing to power the trip unit; and an APM {See Fig. 7) should be installed before proceeding with the test. and b) the current is not more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting (1,) ; because the trip unit will not execute your test instructions when it senses that the current through the breaker exceeds the 50% level. 3) When performing tests on the Long Delay element, be aware that in addition to the standard protection element, the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. (See NOTE 1 under Section 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting.) The action of the LT M will have the same effect of advancing the Long Delay Trip Time if multiple Long Delay Time tests are performed repeatedly - as one might do in making single phase tests on each pole of a breaker in succession, for example. If you have sufficient experience in performing tests with this kind of accelerated trip timing, you may be comfortable with the results of tests performed in quick succession. However, if there is any question, you may simply wait about ten (10) minutes after a Long Delay Trip for the LTM to reset, before you check the next pole Control Power For testing the trip unit, an optional Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) as shown in Fig. 7 is recommended. This Auxiliary Power Module, which operates from a separate 120 Vac supply, may be used when a drawout circuit breaker is in any of its four cell positions, i.e., "Connected", 'Test", "Disconnected" and "Withdrawn" (or "Removed.") Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module {APM) {See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without

112 Page 12 the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well-above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Plug in the Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) to insure control power is available for testing. When the APM is properly connected the "GREEN" Unit Status LED will blink on and off about once per second Not Tripping the Breaker 1. Place the "Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the six "No Trip" test settings, i.e., 1, 2, 3, 8, or 10, x In, or GF Depress the (Black) ''Test" pushbutton and release it - the test starts when the pushbutton is released. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected "No Trip" test value, then the LED related to that function will turn on signifying successful completion of the test action. Note: During the long delay tests the Long Delay LED flashes "RED". Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the ''Trip Reset" pushbutton. All LEDs lighted by the "No Trip" test action should turn "OFF". Should an actual overload or fault condition occur during an in-service, "No Trip Test" sequence, the protection function will override the test function, and the circuit breaker will trip automatically in accordance with the actual Time-Current settings. Note: The "Trip Reset" pushbutton may be depressed at any time. However, should a test already be in progress, the test would be aborted. A test initiated via the integral test panel may be aborted at any time by depressing the ''Trip Reset" pushbutton Tripping the Breaker 1. Make sure that the circuit breaker is carrying no current. (See CAUTION notes under Section 5.1.) NOTE: In the event it is decided to perform a "Breaker Trip Test" while load current is flowing, make sure the circuit breaker is carrying no more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting lr- (The I.L trip unit will not execute your instructions to Test itself, when the load current exceeds 50% of 1,.) 2. Place the ''Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the two ''Trip" test settings, i.e., 6T or GFT. 3. Depress the black "Test" pushbutton (See Fig. 5) and release it - the test is initiated when the pushbutton is released. 4. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected ''Test Amps" value, the circuit breaker will trip and the LED related to that function will light "RED". 5. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the ''Trip Resef' pushbutton (See Fig. 5). All LEDs lighted by the ''Trip" test action should turn "OFF". 6.0 BATTERY (INSIDE THE RATING PLUG) 6.1 General The battery has no part in the protection function of the trip unit. As indicated in Figs. 3 and 6, the battery is provided to maintain the "RED" LED indication of the cause of TRIP in the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. The battery is located in the rating plug along with a battery check pushbutton and a green battery check LED. 6.2 Battery Check The battery is a long life, lithium photo type unit. The status of the battery can be checked at any time by depressing the battery check pushbutton and observing the "GREEN" LED as shown in Fig. 6. If the battery check LED does not light "GREEN", replace the battery. The condition of the battery has no effect on the protection function of the trip unit. Even with the battery removed, the unit will still trip the breaker in accordance with its settings. However, without the battery, the cause of TRIP LED will not be lighted "RED". If the battery is replaced (or if an Auxiliary Power Module is plugged into the trip unit), one or more of the cause of Trip LED's may be illuminated. The user should push the red ''TRIP RESET" button to turn off the indications, and the trip unit will be ready to indicate the next cause of trip. 6.3 Battery Replacement The battery can be easily replaced from the front of the trip unit by lowering the hinged cover of the rating plug as shown in Fig. 6. The battery can then be removed by pulling the battery tab as shown in Fig. 6.

113 I.L Note: The battery can be replaced at any time, even while the circuit breaker is in service, without affecting the operation of the circuit breaker or its protection function. A CAUTION CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED WHEN REPLACING A BATTERY TO INSURE THAT THE CORRECT POLARITIES ARE OBSERVED. POLARITY MARK INGS ARE SHOWN ON THE RATING PLUG WHEN THE HINGED COVER IS OPEN AS INDICATED IN FIG. G. The replacement battery should be the same type or equivalent. Acceptable 3.0 volt lithium batteries may be Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Rating Plug Identification "Battery Check" Pushbutton ! Typical Rating Plug Values for Short. Detav S1 and S2 instantaneous M1 and M2 Settings Battery "OK" if LED Lights "GREEN" wnen "Battery Check" Button ls Pushed Trip Unit Connector (Fits into Keyed Cavity in Top Right Corner of Trip Unit. See Fig. 1) -- Auxiliary Power Module Page 13 obtained from the following companies under their type designation indicated: Company Varta Batteries, Inc. 150 Clarbrook Road Elmsford, N.Y Duracell South Broadway Tarrytown, N.Y (91 4) Sanyo Electric Inc. Battery Division 200 Riser Road Little Ferry, N.J Potantv Marks Model CR 1/3N DL 1/3N CR 1/3N Battery Remcwa l Tab Satterv

114 Page AUXILIARY POWER MODULE The Auxiliary Power Module or APM (Cat No. PRTAAPM), illustrated in Fig. 7, is an encapsulated power supply that requires a 120 Vac input at either 50 or 60 Hz. It provides an output of 32 Vdc (nominal 40 Vdc open circuit) which can be used for testing a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. When a drawout circuit breaker is equipped with a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, it can be conveniently set and tested while the circuit breaker is out of its cell or in its cell in the ''Test", "Disconnect" or 'Withdrawn" positions by using the Auxiliary Power Module. The Auxiliary Power Module is equipped with a unique plug-in connector suitable only for plugging into the keyed receptacle in the upper right corner of a Digitrip RMS Trip Unit as shown in Fig. 1. This prohibits the possible use of an incorrect type power module. 8.0 FRAME RATINGS, (WHERE APPLICABLE, SENSOR RATINGS) AND RATING PLUGS The Frame Rating of a circuit breaker is the maximum RMS current it can carry continuously. The maximum Short-Circuit Current Rating of the Circuit breaker are usually related to the Frame Rating as well. It is often times desirable to be able to choose a current value (In), less than the full frame rating, to be the basis for the coordination of the circuit breaker's protection functions, without affecting its short-circuit current capability. For the Digitrip 510 trip unit this is implemented by changing the Rating Plug (and/or Current Sensors, where applicable - See your circuit breaker instructions (listed in Section 9.0 below) to determine if this applies to your circuit breaker). The (Current) Sensor Rating (where applicable) is the maximum RMS current the circuit breaker can carry with the specified current sensors installed. The Sensor Rating can be the same or less than the Frame Rating, but not greater. The Rating Plug (See Fig. 6) fits into a special cavity to complete the trip unit (See Fig. 1 ). Rating plugs have two current ratings listed on their covers (See Fig. 6): 1) the "Must be used with Frame Rated" cur- I.L rent value (or "Sensor Rated", if applicable), and 2) "In (Rated I) =" current value. This latter value, (In) is the basis for the trip unit current settings: 1) The Instantaneous and Ground Current Settings (if provided) are multiples of (In) (See Sections 4.6 and 4.8) The Long Delay Current Setting, lr, is a multiple of (In). Long Delay Current Setting = lr = LD x (In). (See Section 4.2) 2) 3) The Short Delay Current Setting (if provided) is indirectly dependent upon (In), because it is a multiple of lr, which in turn is a multiple of (In). Short Delay Current Setting (See Section 4.4) = SO x lr = SO X LD X (In). Rating Plugs for the Digitrip RMS 510 trip units are marked for and may be applied on both 50 and 60 Hz systems. A CAUTION BEFORE YOU FIT THE RA TING PLUG INTO THE TRIP UNIT, BE SURE TO CHECKTHAT THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RA TING IF APPLICABLE), MA TCH THOSE PRINTED ON THE RA TING PLUG COVER. INSTALLING A RA TING PLUG THA T DOES NOT MA TCH THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RA TING, IF APPLICA BLE), CAN PRODUCE SERIOUS MISCOORDINA TION AND/OR FAILURE OF THE PROTECTION SYSTEM. Complete catalog descriptions of all available rating plugs are given in the applicable circuit breaker supplementary instruction leaflets. (See Section 9) Note: Rating plugs from Digitrip models 500/&00noo/ 800 CAN NOT be used with model 510 trip units. The connection pins are located in different positions, so that one cannot accidentally use the incorrect kind of plug.

115 I.L REFERENCES 9.1 Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies I.L I.L I.L Instructions for Digitrip AMS 510 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip AMS 610 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip AMS 810 Trip Unit 9.2 Type OS Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers I.B I.B AD SC SC SC B508 Instructions for Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Types OS and DSL Supplement B to Digitrip AMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Types OS and DSL Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Connection Diagram for Type OS Circuit Breakers 9.3 Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers I.L I.L AD SC SC SC I.S Instruction for the Systems Pow-A Breaker and Drawout Mechanism Supplementary Instructions for the Systems Pow-A Breaker used with the Digitrip AMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Type SPB Systems Pow-A Breaker Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) SPB Master Connection Diagram 9.4 Series c A-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers 29C106 29C C713 AD A SC SC SC Frame Book Frame Instruction Leaflet Supplementary Instructions for Series c A-Frame used with the Digitrip AMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for A-Frame Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Page 15 I.L. 29C714 Master Connection Diagram for Series c A-Frame Circuit Breaker APPENDIX A ZONE INTERLOCKING Assume a ground fault of 2000 Amperes occurs and refer to Fig A.1. CASE 1 : There is no Zone Selective Interlocking. (standard time delay coordination is used) Fault 3 The branch breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.1 s. Fault 2 The feeder breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.3 s. Fault 1 The breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.5 s. CASE 2: There is Zone Selective Interlocking Fault 3 The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault and Z3 will send an interlocking signal to the Z2 trip unit; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to Z1. Z1 and Z2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the branch breaker Z3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker Z2 will clear the fault in 0.3 s (as above). Similarly, in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 2 The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to the Z1 trip unit. Z1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 1 There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s. Figure A.2 presents a Zone Selective Interlocking connection diagram for a system with two main breakers from incoming sources and a bus tie breaker. Note the blocking diode D1 is needed so that the feeder breakers can send interlocking signals to both the main and tie breakers, without having the tie breaker send itself an interlocking signal.

116 Page 16 I.L Fig. A. 1 Fig. A.2 f Q) 1 N J t N Q) c 2 0 N Notes: A 1: Wiring to be twisted pair of AWG No. 14 to AWG No. 20. I Route Zone Interlocking wiring sepa A ) Main Z1 rate from power conductors. DO NOT GROUND any Zone Interlock Wiring. 0.5 Sec 1200 A 1600 A ) Feeder 200 A t- 0.1 "' Q) c 0 N 3 ) 0.3 Sec 400 A Branch Sec 100 A Typical Zone Interlocking (Ground Fault Protection) M1 0.1 Sec 0.1 Sec Z2 Z3 M2 0.5 Sec F21 A2: The maximum distance between first and last zone is 250 feet {1 1 0 m). A3: A Maximum of 20 breakers may be connected in parallel in one Zone. F22 2 Legend =Common (Ungrounded) =Short Delay Output Signal to Higher Level Zone = Short Delay Input Signa I from Lower Level Zone =Ground Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Ground Input Signal from Lower Level Zone /.ault at Location 2 F Sec 0.1 Sec 0.1 Sec Typical Zone Interlocking Connections with Two Main Breakers (M1, M2) and a Tie Breaker (T) (Short Delay Protection) I'!t" N

117 I.L Page 17 NOTES

118 Page 18 I.L NOTES

119 I.L Page 19 NOTES

120 Page 20 This instruction booklet is published solely for information purposes and should not be considered all inclusive. If further information is required, you should consult Cutler-Hammer. Sale of product shown in this literature is subject to terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Cutler-Hammer Inc. selling policies or other contractual agreement between the parties. This literature is not intended to and does not enlarge or add to any such contract. The sole source governing the rights and remedies of any purchaser of this equipment is the contract between the purchaser and Cutler-Hammer Inc. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PA RTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTA BILITY, OR WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAG E OF TRADE, ARE MADE REGARDING THE INFORMATION, RECOMMENDATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN. In no event will Cutler-Hammer Inc. be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damage or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment, plant or power system, cost of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities, or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the use of the information, recommendations and description contained herein. Cutler-Hammer Inc Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, U.S.A. Style No. 7B29C35H03 Printed in U.S.A./CCI I.L

121 ltcgi Cutler-Hammer I.L Table of Contents Instructions for Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Page 1.0 General Description Protection Information Testing UL Listed Devices Principle of Operation General Trip and Operation Indicators Test Provisions DIScriminator (Making Current Release) OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) Zone Interlocking Protection Settings General Long Delay Current Settings Long Delay Time Settings Short Delay Current Settings Short Delay Time Settings Instantaneous Current Settings NO Instantaneous Current Settings Ground Fault Current Settings... 8 Ground Fault Time Delay Settings Test Procedure General When To Test Test Provision Conducting Tests Control Power Not Tripping the Breaker Tripping the Breaker Battery (Inside the Rating Plug) General Battery Check Battery Replacement Auxiliary Power Module Frame Ratings, (where applicable, Sensor Ratings) and Rating Plugs References Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies Type OS Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Type SPB Systems Pow-A Breakers Series C% A-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Appendix A Zone Interlocking - Example , Supersedes I.L. 29 BB5A dated September 1994 A WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL OR PERFORM MAIN TENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENERGIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT NO VOLTAGE IS PRESENT BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE TASK, AND ALWAYS FOLLOW GENERALLY ACCEPTED SAFETY PROCEDURES. CUTLER-HAMMER IS NOT LIABLE FOR THE MISAPPLICATION OR MISINSTAL LATION OF ITS PRODUCTS. It is strongly urged that the user observe all recommendations, warnings and cautions relating to the safety of personnel and equipment, as well as general and local health and safety laws, codes, and procedures. The recommendations and information contained herein are based on experience and judgment, but should not be considered to be all-inclusive or covering every application or circumstance which may arise. If you have any questions or need further information or instructions, please contact your local representative, or the Customer Support Center for the type of circuit breaker you have: Circuit Call Send to Breaker Telephone FAX Type Number Number DS/DSL (41 2) ( 41 2) SPB (412) (412) Series c R-Frame (41 2) (412) GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.1 Protection The Digitrip RMS 510, illustrated in Fig. 1, is a custom application specific integrated circuit based trip unit suitable for use in types OS and DSL low voltage AC power circuit breakers and type SPB Systems Pow-A circuit breakers and Series c A-Frame molded case circuit breakers. The Digitrip RMS 510 provides true RMS current sensing for proper correlation with thermal characteristics of conductors and equipment. Interchangeable rating plugs are provided to establish the continuous current rating of each circuit breaker.

122 Page 2 The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is completely self-contained and when the circuit breaker is closed, requires no external control power to operate its protection systems. It operates from current signal levels and control power derived through current sensors integrally mounted in the circuit breaker. The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is available in six different types. Each trip unit may be equipped with a maximum of five phase and two ground (time-current) adjustments to meet specific application requirements. The types of protection available fo r each model include the following, which are illustrated in Figures 2.1 through 2.6: Protection Long Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Short Time Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/ Ground Fig. 1 Circuit Breaker Assembly Cell Location Reference LED's tight ''RED" to indicate cause of trip Time-Current Curve for Phase Protection Time-Current Curve, lor Ground Protection View Settings in Window Types Ll* LS* LSI* LIG LSG LSIG Refer to Figure Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Model LSIG with Rating Plug I.L Note*: RMS Digitrip Type Ll, LS, and LSI trip units can be applied on 3-pole or 4-pole circuit breakers for protection of the neutral circuit, IF the circuit breaker is wired and MARKED for NEUTRAL PROTECTION. Refer to the National Electric Code for appropriate application of 4-pole breakers. 1.2 Information Light Emitting Diodes (LED's) on the face of the trip unit light "Red" to indicate the reason for an automatic trip operation. The battery in the rating plug maintains the reason for trip indication following an automatic trip operation, until the ''TRIP RESET" button is pushed. The "Green" LED in the lower right corner "blinks" to indicate the trip unit is operating normally. The battery in the rating plug is "OK" if the LED lights "Green" when the "battery check" button next to it is pushed. (See Section 6.). Note: The Digitrip RMS 510 provides all of its protection functions regardless of the status of the battery. The battery serves only to maintain the indication of the reason for automatic trip. Adjust Protection Settings for Desired values with Rotary Switches, Trip Unit / Operational Status "Blinking Green"=OK

123 I.L Fig Long Time/Instantaneous Protection (L /) Fig. 2.2 Long Time/Short Time Protection (LS) Fig Fig. 2.4 Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Protection (LSI) Page 3 Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LIG)

124 Page 4 Fig Testing Long Time/Short Time/Ground/Protection (LSG) To test the trip unit, use the integral test panel. (See Section 5.0.} 2.0 UL LISTED DEVICES Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Units are "Listed" by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Under UL File E7819, for use in types DS, DSL, SPB and Series c R-Frame circuit breakers. 3.0 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 3.1 General The Digitrip RMS 51 0 trip unit is designed for use in industrial circuit breaker environments where the ambient temperatures can range from -20 C to +85 C and rarely exceed 70 to 75 C. If, however, temperatures in the neighborhood of the trip unit do exceed this range, the trip unit performance may be degraded. In order to insure that the tripping function is not compromised due to an over-temperature condition, the Digitrip RMS 510 microcomputer chip has a built-in over-temperature protection feature, factory set to trip the breaker if the chip temperature exceeds 95 C. If over-temperature is the reason for the trip, the Long Delay Time LED will light "RED". Fig. 2.6 I.L Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LS/G) The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip unit provides three basic functions: Protection, Information and Testing. A typical trip unit and rating plug are illustrated in Fig. 1. Individual product instruction leaflets referenced in Section 9.0 illustrate typical Digitrip RMS Trip Units installed in specific breakers. The trip unit employs the Cutler-Hammer Inc. custom designed integrated circuit SJ..1.RE + chip, which includes a microcomputer to perform its numeric and logic functions. The principle of operation is described by the block diagram shown in Fig. 3. In the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, all required sensing and tripping power to operate its protection function is derived from the current sensors in the circuit breaker. The secondary currents from these sensors provide the correct input information for the protection functions, as well as tripping power, whenever the circuit breaker is carrying current. These current signals develop analog voltages across the appropriate calibrating resistors including: 1) Phase currents 2) Ground current (when supplied) 3} Rating plug The resulting analog voltages are digitized by the custom designed integrated circuits.

125 I.L urrent.. '"''""" hf;::::t:::t=j Fig. 3 \LOAD, LOWER 1 Digitrip RMS 510 Block Diagram with Breaker Interface The microcomputer, in cyclic fashion, repeatedly scans the voltage values across each calibrating resistor and enters these values into its Random Access Memory (RAM). These data are used to calculate true RMS current values, which are then repeatedly compared with the protection function settings and other operating data stored in the Read Only Memory (ROM). The software program then determines whether to initiate protection functions, including tripping the breaker through the low energy trip device (Flux Transfer Shunt Trip or Direct Trip Actuator) in the circuit breaker. 3.2 Trip and Operation Indicators The LEOs, shown in Figs. 1 and , on the face of the trip unit, light "RED" to indicate the reason tor any automatic trip operation. As indicated in Figs , each LED is strategically located in the related segment of the time-current curve depicted on the face of the trip unit. The reason for trip is identified by the segment of the time-current curve where the LED is lighted "RED". Following an automatic trip operation, the back-up battery, continues to supply power to the LEOs as indicated in Figs. 3 and 6. To check the status of the battery, see Section 6. Push the ''Trip Reset" button shown in Fig. 1, to turn "Off" the LEOs following a trip operation. A green colored LED, as shown in Fig. 1, indicates the operational status of the trip unit. Once the load current through the circuit breaker exceeds approximately 10% of the frame/current sensor rating, the green LED will flash "On" and "Off" once each second, to indicate the trip unit is energized and operating properly. Note: If the LED is steadily "GREEN", i.e. not flashing, the trip unit is not ready. Integrated Circuit SJ.RE+ TM Chip 3.3 Test Provisions (See Section 5.0) ":S ; h; dfp.c :, "11 See 5ect on4 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) (For Types LS and LSG trip units only.) Tnp llnn Op reton g St u1 lrh:itc tor!flash In!) GREEN indtcates OK SPeSectoon 32 Page 5 When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous protection setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, a making current release (or DIScriminator) circuit is provided. This circuit will prevent the circuit breaker from being closed and latched-in on a faulted circuit. The non-adjustable release is pre-set at eleven (1 1) times the installed rating plug current (In). The making current release is enabled only fo r the first ten (1 0) cycles following an initial circuit breaker closing operation, provided the load current exceeds approximately 10% of the circuit breaker frame (or current sensor) rating. Should the load current through the circuit breaker drop to less than the 10% value, the release will reset. The release, once reset, will remain enabled until the load current passing through the circuit breaker has exceeded the 10% value tor 10 cycles. The making current release will trip the circuit breaker instantaneously. In the event the breaker is intended to close (but not to trip out again) into a circuit whose current could initially be higher than 11 x In, it is possible to make the DIScriminator inactive. If the breaker does close onto a tully rated fault current, when the DIScriminator is inactive, the breaker will wait for the full short-time delay setting before it trips. The DIScriminator (making current release) can be made inactive by turning the "OVERRIDE/" setting switch (nearest the bottom edge of the trip unit) from the "DIS" position, to the "[BLANK]" position. (See Figs. 2.2 and 2.5.)

126 Page 6 Notes: 1 This switch has eight (8) positions, and seven (7) of them show "DIS" in the window, while ONLY ONE position shows "[BLANK]". 2 When the "OVERRIDE/" window shows "[BLANK]", the only fast-acting high short-circuit protection available is the OVERRIDE [Fixed Instantaneous]. (See 3.5 below.) 3.5 OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) (For Types LS And LSG Trip Units Only) When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, the Fixed Instantaneous "Override" analog trip circuit is automatically pre-set to a value no greater than the short-time withstand current rating of the circuit breaker in which the trip unit is installed. Since the specific values vary for different circuit breaker types and ratings, refer to time-current curves, listed in Section 9, for the values applicable to your breaker. If breaker trips due to high instantaneous current, the "OVERRIDE" LED will light "RED". 3.6 Zone Interlocking Zone Selective Interlocking (or Zone Interlocking) is available (see Fig. 3) for Digitrip RMS Trip Units having Short Delay and/or Ground Fault protection. Zone Selective Interlocking provides the fastest possible tripping for faults within the breaker's zone of protection, and yet also provides positive coordination among all breakers in the system (mains, ties, feeders and downstream breakers) to limit the outage to the affected part of the system only. When Zone Interlocking is enabled, a fault within the breaker's zone of protection will cause the RMS DIG ITRIP trip unit to: a) Trip the affected breaker instantaneously, and at the same time b) Send a signal to upstream RMS DIGITRIP trip units to restrain from tripping immediately. The restraining signal causes the upstream breakers to follow their set coordination times, so that only the minimum service is disrupted, while the fault is cleared in the shortest time possible. (This signal requires only a single pair of wires from the output terminals of the downstream breaker's trip unit to the input terminals of the upstream breaker's trip unit. For specific instructions see the applicable connection diagrams for your breaker listed in Section 9.0.) I.L Note: If a breaker (M) receives a Zone Interlocking signal from another breaker (F), but the fault current level is less than the trip unit setting for breaker (M), the signal from the other breaker (F) will not cause breaker (M) to trip. A CAUTION IF ZONE INTERLOCKING IS NOT TO BE USED (I.E. STANDARD TIME-DELAY COORDINATION ONLY IS INTENDED), THE ZONE INTERLOCKING TERMINALS MUST BE CONNECTED WITH JUMPER WIRES, AS SPECIFIED ON THE CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR YOUR BREAKER (SEE SECTION 9.0), SO THE TIME DELAY SETTINGS WILL PROVIDE THE INTENDED COORDINATION. For an example of how Zone Selective Interlocking may be used, See Appendix A. 4.0 PROTECTION SETTINGS 4.1 General Prior to placing circuit breaker in operation, each trip unit protection setting must be set to the values specified by the engineer responsible for the installation. The number of settings that must be made is determined by the protector model supplied as illustrated in Figs. 2.1 through 2.6. Each setting is made with a rotary switch, using a small screwdriver. The selected setting for each adjustment appears in its respective rectangular viewing window as illustrated in Fig. 1. The installed rating plug establishes the maximum continuous current rating of the circuit breaker (In). Instantaneous and ground current settings are defined in multiples of (In). To illustrate the effect of each protection curve setting, simulated Time-Current curves are pictured on the face of the trip unit. The rotary switch to make each setting is located nearest that portion of the simulated Time-Current curve it controls. Should an automatic "trip" occur (as a result of the current exceeding the pre-selected value), the LED in the appropriate segment of the simulated Time-Current curve will light "RED" indicating the reason fo r "trip". The available settings, along with the illustrated effect of changing the settings, are given in Figs. 4.1 through 4.7.

127 I.L Long Delay Current Setting There are eight (8) available Long Delay Settings, as illustrated in Fig Each setting, called "/;' is expressed as a multiple (ranging from.5 to 1) of the rating plug current (In) Note: "1," is also the basis for the Short-Delay Current Setting. (See Section 4.4.) Fig Long Delay Current Settings 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting,, Available Settings.5,.6,.7,.8,.85,.9,.95, 1 In Multiples of Rating Plug Amperes llnl There are eight (8) available Long Delay Time Settings, as illustrated in Fig. 4.2, ranging from 2 to 24 seconds. These settings are the total clearing times when the current value equals six (6) times 1,. Fig. 4.2 Notes: 6xl, Long Delay Time Settings Available Settings 2, 4. 7, , 20, 24 Seconds at 6 Times Long Delay Setting (I,) 1) In addition to the standard Long Delay Protection Element, the Digitrip RMS 510 trip unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. If a breaker is reclosed soon after a Long Delay Trip, and the current again exceeds the Long Delay Setting, 1, the LTM automatically reduces the time to trip, to Page? allow for the fact that the load circuit temperature is already higher than normal, due to the prior overload condition. Each time an overload condition is repeated, the LTM causes the breaker to trip in a time progressively earlier than the "Long Delay Time Setting". When the load current returns to normal, the LTM begins to reset; and after about 10 minutes it has reset fully, so that next Long Delay trip time will again be the "Setting" value. In certain applications it may be desirable to disable the LTM function. The LTM function can be disabled by (first opening the breaker and then) removing the Rating Plug (See Figures 1 and 6), and lastly moving the LTM jumper (inside the rating plug cavity, See figure 4.2.1) to its "INAC TIVE" connection. (You can enable the LTM function again any time you wish by moving the LTM jumper back to its original "ACTIVE" connection.) / '-'- Standard from Factory "l TM Active" j "L TM Inactive" -- Fig Long Time Memory "LTM" Jumper The action of the LTM is a factor to consider in performing multiple Long Delay Time tests. (See Section 5.4.) 2) There is a condition under which the Long Delay Trip LED can erroneously indicate a LOT has occurred, even though the breaker is still closed. This can happen when an overload current momentarily exceeds the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, so that the Long Delay LED flashes "RED" to indicate the overload condition. Then if, at the very moment when the LED is "ON", the load current would then suddenly drop to a value less than 10% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating, the trip unit stops functioning while the "4bit Latch Chip" (See Fig. 3) is set and the LED remains Lighted. If the current would again increase to a value above the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, and then return to normal, the

128 .c om J.L Page Short Delay Time Setting 4.7 NO Instantaneous Current Setting For types LS and LSG trip units, please see Sections 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) and 3.5 OVER RIDE (Fixed Instantaneous), for available fast-acting high short-circuit protection. 4.8 Ground Fault Current Setting The eight (8) Ground Fault Current Settings are labeled with the code letters "A" through "K" (except there are no "G" or "I" settings), as illustrated in Fig In general, the specific current settings range from 0.25 to 1.0 times (In), the rating plug value, but cannot exceed A. The specific G round Current Settings for each letter are listed in Table 1 and on the applicable Time-Current curve for the breaker. ar As illustrated in Fig. 4.4, there are two different Short Delay cu rve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 12t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the short delay current range than will the flat response. ua ls There are eight (8) available Short Delay Cu rrent Set tings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times 1, and the other two settings are "S1 " or "S2" times 1,. (REMEMBER: I, is the Long Delay Current Setting). The values that "S1 " and "S2" have depend upon the type of circuit b reaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Cu rrent Cu rves referenced in Section 9.0. an 4.4 Short Delay Current Setting other two settings are "M1 " or "M2" times (In)- The values that "M 1 " and "M2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Cu rrent Cu rves referenced in Section 9.0. tm LOT will reset itself. You can of course, manually clear the LOT (or any other trip indication) at any time, by pushing the " PUSH to RESET" button. (See Figure 1.) 51 Fig. 4.3 ::=- and 52 I - - -cot' I Sec. 0 lp III,. e \., 1:; l-.:: = 3 L -_-_,) , 6, S,, S, ca.....n.. {'"", ", Short Delay 1.,_... C ' -" ' Settin g, M.,..,,M " Long Delay Setting. 1,.2, Seconds w1 h Flat Responc e Values are Specified on Rating Plug tri p... Sho. Delay Time Available Settings Short Delay Current Settings _] ill.e lec Five flat (. 1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2t (. 1 *,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2 t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (* ) that appears in the viewing window. The 1 2t response is applicable to cu rrents less than eight (8) times 1,, the Long Delay Setting. For currents greater than 8 times 1,, the 1 2t response reverts to the flat response. Note: See also Section 3.6, Zone Interlocking, above. w 4.6 Instantaneous Current Setting fj1,,.._-.::. (_,_ '.J,_ -" T 1 I ', -, "*"In V iewi n g Window Indicates l't ShapH Fig. 4.4 I --.:::.3 I I 8 X lr M I I w r'l 1 1 w Ft Shape Returns to 8 x 1, Flat Response at Cu rre 1ts Higher than. 1,.J*,. s Seconds Shape l't with Short Delay Time Settings ww There are eight (8) available I nstantaneous Current Set tings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times (In) the rating plug val ue, and the Effective May 1 997

129 I.L Fig. 4.5 r-. I I I I Setting lnst. X I L In :_ --_-1 M1 and M2 Values are Specified on Rating Plug Instantaneous Current Settings Available Settings 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, M,, M, In Multiples of Rating Plug Amperes O n ) Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Setting Fig. 4.6 Gnct-Fault (I] xl n e ljo] Av Ground Fa ult Current Settings ailable Settings A, B. C, D, E. F. H, K Specific Values Given on C1rcu1t Breaker Time-Current Curve and in Table 1 TA BLE 1 -GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETIINGS GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS (AMPERES)G:l Page 9 A B c D E F H K BO BB BB 250 Iii BO w cr w BO a B 1B B 630 :2 5. BOO BO BO 600 BOO C) ::J J a BO C) B 1200 z BO BOO B cr BOO w...j B J (/) 3000/ !': 3200 BOO B G:l To lerances on settings are ±1 0% of values shown. C2l Refer to Type DS, type SPB or Series C R Frame supplemental instruction leaflets given in Section 9 for list of available rating plugs for each type circuit breaker. 4.9 Ground Fault Time Delay Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.7, there are two different Ground Fault curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2 t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2 t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the ground fault current range than will the flat response. Five flat (.1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2 t (.1*,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2 t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the setting viewing window. The 1 2 t response is applicable to currents less than times the ampere rating of the installed rating plug (In)- For currents greater than x In the 1 2 t response reverts to the flat response

130 Page 10 Fig r-. I I I I 1 : Available Settings :.1, ] Seconds I : L _ = I I r"" \... _ : _1 I I : I 1 I 3,.4,.5 with Flat Response l't Shape / Returns to Flat ] Response at In 0 I I ' '.3*.. I I ' ' I I, ',f I Approximately 5*, ' Seconds with "*"In Viewing Window ' ': '.i 12t Shape lnd1cates ' ' t Shape Ground Fa ult Time Delay Settings Note: See also Section 3.6 on Zone Interlocking. 5.0 TEST PROCEDURES 5.1 General A DANGER DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL, TEST OR PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENER GIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. DE-ENERGIZE THE CIRCUIT AND DISCONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTE NANCE OR TESTS. As illustrated in Figs. 1 and 5, an integral test panel is provided to test the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. Several no-trip settings are provided to check the trip unit operation without actually tripping the circuit breaker. I.L ,... - Available "Test Amps" Settings Breaker Trips At 6T and GFT CD "6T" =Phase Current Test at I ) Fig. 5 Test Amps :!) x In L Test 0 0 Reset Unit 0 Status 6xln and TRIPS breaker; "1, 2, 3, 8 or 10" xi =Phase Current Test - NO'breaker TRIP; "GFT" =Ground Current Test and TRIPS breaker; "GF" =Ground Current Test - NO breaker TRIP. See Section for inservice test trip Push, then release Trip Reset button to reset Trip Unit. Required following all automatic trip and test Push, then release Test button to test. Test operation begins with release of pushbutton. Integral Test Panel (Lower Right Corner of Trip Unit) A CAUTION TESTING A CIRCUIT BREAKER UNDER "TRIP CON DITIONS" WHILE IT IS IN SERVICE AND CARRYING LOAD CURRENT, WHETHER DONE BY INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL MEANS, IS NOT RECOMMENDED. ANY TRIPPING OPERATION WILL CAUSE DISRUP TION OF SERVICE AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM UNNECESSARY SWITCH ING OF CONNECTED EQUIPMENT. TESTING OF A CIRCUIT BREAKER THAT RESULTS IN THE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE DONE ONLY WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN THE "TEST" OR "DISCONNECTED" CELL POSITIONS OR WHILE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS ON A TEST BENCH. To preserve the primary protection function of the trip unit, all in-service testing under ''Trip" or "No-Trip" conditions are only performed at load current values no greater than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,. Any attempt to conduct in-service testing when the load current exceeds 50% of 1,, will not be executed by the trip unit. Since the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is completely selfpowered using energy derived from the current sensors installed in the circuit breaker, all in-service tests conducted should be conducted with the auxiliary control power module, shown in Fig. 7, plugged into the trip unit. This action will avoid difficulties caused by load current levels that are too low to operate the trip unit.

131 t I.L When To Test Tests can be conducted with the breaker in the "connected" cell position while carrying load current. However, as stated in the caution note in Section 5.1, good practice will limit circuit breaker in-service "trip tests", where required, to maintenance periods during times of minimum load conditions. Testing, prior to start-up can best be accomplished with the breaker out of its cell or in the "Test", "Disconnected" or "Withdrawn" (or Removed) cell positions. Note: Since time-current settings are based on desired system coordination and protection schemes, the protection settings selected and preset in accordance with Section 4.0 above should not be altered during or as a part of any routine test sequence. 5.3 Test Provision As indicated in Fig. 5, six different ''Test Amps" settings (1, 2, 3, 6T, 8 and 1 OX In) are available for testing the phase elements of the trip unit, and two (GF, GFT) are provided for testing the ground elements. A CAUTION A SETTING OF EITHER 6T OR GFT WILL TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. (SEE SECTION BELOW.) For any combination of the phase protection settings, an appropriate "No Trip" condition can be set to test the long time, short time and instantaneous trip settings without tripping the circuit breaker. In the "GF" test position, the level of test current based on In, is adequate to demonstrate the operating condition of the trip unit without tripping the circuit breaker. This is a functional check only, not a calibration. 5.4 Conducting Tests 1 ) Before starting any test sequence, check the Unit Status (Green LED) in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) to be sure it is blinking on and off about once each second, which indicates that the trip unit is functioning normally. In the event the Unit Status LED is not blinking, install an Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7), or if you have one already, check to see that it is connected correctly. 2) If the circuit breaker is carrying current, check for the following conditions: a) Page 11 the current is not less than 1 0% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating; be sure the "GREEN" Unit Status LED (in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) is blinking on and off (indicating that there is enough current flowing to provide the power necessary to operate the trip unit). In the event the Unit Status LED is either lighted "GREEN" or "OFF" continuously, there is NOT enough current flowing to power the trip unit; and an APM (See Fig. 7) should be installed before proceeding with the test. and b) the current is not more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting (1,) ; because the trip unit will not execute your test instructions when it senses that the current through the breaker exceeds the 50% level. 3) When performing tests on the Long Delay element, be aware that in addition to the standard protection element, the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects cf repeated overload conditions. (See NOTE 1 under Section 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting.) The action of the LT M will have the same effect of advancing the Long Delay Trip Time if multiple Long Delay Time tests are performed repeatedly - as one might do in making single phase tests on each pole of a breaker in succession, for example. If you have sufficient experience in performing tests with this kind of accelerated trip timing, you may be comfortable with the results of tests performed in quick succession. However, if there is any question, you may simply wait about ten (1 O) minutes after a Long Delay Trip for the LTM to reset, before you check the next pole Control Power For testing the trip unit, an optional Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) as shown in Fig. 7 is recommended. This Auxiliary Power Module, which operates from a separate 120 Vac supply, may be used when a drawout circuit breaker is in any of its four cell positions, i.e., "Connected", "Test", "Disconnected" and 'Withdrawn" (or "Removed.") Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without

132 Page 12 the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well-above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Plug in the Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) to insure control power is available for testing. When the APM is properly connected the "GREEN" Unit Status LED will blink on and off about once per second Not Tripping the Breaker Place the 'Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the six "No Trip" test settings, i.e., 1, 2, 3, 8, or 10, x In, or GF. Depress the (Black) 'Test" pushbutton and release it - the test starts when the pushbutton is released. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected "No Trip" test value, then the LED related to that function will turn on signifying successful completion of the test action. Note: During the long delay tests the Long Delay LED flashes "RED". 4. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the 'Trip Reset" pushbutton. All LEOs lighted by the "No Trip" test action should turn "OFP'. Should an actual overload or fault condition occur during an in-service, "No Trip Test" sequence, the protection function will override the test function, and the circuit breaker will trip automatically in accordance with the actual Time-Current settings. Note: The "Trip Reset" pushbutton may be depressed at any time. However, should a test already be in progress, the test would be aborted. A test initiated via the integral test panel may be aborted at any time by depressing the "Trip Reset" pushbutton Tripping the Breaker 1. Make sure that the circuit breaker is carrying no current. (See CAUTION notes under Section 5.1.) NOTE: In the event it is decided to perform a "Breaker Trip Test" while load current is flowing, make sure the circuit breaker is carrying no more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting 1,. (The I.L trip unit will not execute your instructions to Test itself, when the load current exceeds 50% of lr) 2. Place the 'Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the two "Trip" test settings, i.e., 6T or GFT. 3. Depress the black "Test" pushbutton (See Fig. 5) and release it - the test is initiated when the pushbutton is released. 4. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected 'Test Amps" value, the circuit breaker will trip and the LED related to that function will light "RED". 5. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the 'Trip Reset" pushbutton (See Fig. 5). All LEOs lighted by the 'Trip" test action should turn "OFF". 6.0 BATTERY (INSIDE THE RATING PLUG) 6.1 General The battery has no part in the protection function of the trip unit. As indicated in Figs. 3 and 6, the battery is provided to maintain the "RED" LED indication of the cause of TRIP in the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. The battery is located in the rating plug along with a battery check pushbutton and a green battery check LED. 6.2 Battery Check The battery is a long life, lithium photo type unit. The status of the battery can be checked at any time by depressing the battery check pushbutton and observing the "G REEN" LED as shown in Fig. 6. If the battery check LED does not light "GREEN", replace the battery. The condition of the battery has no effect on the protection function of the trip unit. Even with the battery removed, the unit will still trip the breaker in accordance with its settings. However, without the battery, the cause of TRIP LED will not be lighted "RED". If the battery is replaced (or if an Auxiliary Power Module is plugged into the trip unit), one or more of the cause of Trip LED's may be illuminated. The user should push the red 'TRIP RESET" button to turn off the indications, and the trip unit will be ready to indicate the next cause of trip. 6.3 Battery Replacement The battery can be easily replaced from the front of the trip unit by lowering the hinged cover of the rating plug as shown in Fig. 6. The battery can then be removed by pulling the battery tab as shown in Fig. 6.

133 I.L Note: The battery can be replaced at any time, even while the circuit breaker is in service, without affecting the operation of the circuit breaker or its protection function. A CAUTION CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED WHEN REPLACING A BATTERY TO INSURE THAT THE CORRECT POLARITIES ARE OBSERVED. POLARITY MARK INGS ARE SHOWN ON THE RATING PLUG WHEN THE HINGED COVER IS OPEN AS INDICATED IN FIG. 6. The replacement battery should be the same type or equivalent. Acceptable 3.0 volt lithium batteries may be Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Rating Plug is for Type DS Circmt Breakers Only Ratmg Plugs for R-Framc and SPB Breakers am S milar Ratmg Plug lctent ificati on "Batterv Check' Pushbuttot' J Typical Rating Plug Battery "OK" if LED Lrghts "GREEN" when "Battery Check" BrJ!ton rs Pushed Trip Unit Connector (Fits into Keyed Cavity In Top Right Corner of Trip Unit. See Fig. 1) --. Ca! MlTAAPM 1 AC :l!ji 51!. mnt :iwwll1 4 A m!.l1 C'tt \!rill\ ltll$ l::vta.; RMS Auxiliary Power Module Page 13 obtained from the following companies under their type designation indicated: Company Varta Batteries, Inc. 150 Clarbrook Road Elmsford, N.Y Duracell South Broadway Ta rrytown, N.Y (91 4) Sanyo Electric Inc. Battery Division 200 Riser Road Little Ferry, N.J Rating Plug Retent on Screw I Po>antv Marks Model CR 1/3N DL 1/3N CR 1/3N Batte' Removal Tab Battery

134 Page AUXILIARY POWER MODULE The Auxiliary Power Module or APM (Cat No. PRTAAPM), illustrated in Fig. 7, is an encapsulated power supply that requires a 120 Vac input at either 50 or 60 Hz. It provides an output of 32 Vdc (nominal 40 Vdc open circuit) which can be used for testing a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. When a drawout circuit breaker is equipped with a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, it can be conveniently set and tested while the circuit breaker is out of its cell or in its cell in the 'Test", "Disconnect" or "Withdrawn" positions by using the Auxiliary Power Module. The Auxiliary Power Module is equipped with a unique plug-in connector suitable only for plugging into the keyed receptacle in the upper right corner of a Digitrip RMS Trip Unit as shown in Fig. 1. This prohibits the possible use of an incorrect type power module. 8.0 FRAME RATINGS, (WHERE APPLICABLE, SENSOR RATINGS) AND RATING PLUGS The Frame Rating of a circuit breaker is the maximum RMS current it can carry continuously. The maximum Short-Circuit Current Rating of the Circuit breaker are usually related to the Frame Rating as well. It is often times desirable to be able to choose a current value (In), less than the full frame rating, to be the basis for the coordination of the circuit breaker's protection functions, without affecting its short-circuit current capability. For the Digitrip 510 trip unit this is implemented by changing the Rating Plug (and/or Current Sensors, where applicable - See your circuit breaker instructions (listed in Section 9.0 below) to determine if this applies to your circuit breaker). The (Current) Sensor Rating (where applicable) is the maximum RMS current the circuit breaker can carry with the specified current sensors installed. The Sensor Rating can be the same or less than the Frame Rating, but not greater. The Rating Plug (See Fig. 6) fits into a special cavity to complete the trip unit (See Fig. 1 ). Rating plugs have two current ratings listed on their covers (See Fig. 6): 1) the "Must be used with Frame Rated" cur- I.L rent value (or "Sensor Rated", if applicable), " and 2) "In (Rated I) = current value. This latter val ue, (In) is the basis for the trip unit current settings: 1) The Instantaneous and Ground Current Settings (if provided) are multiples of (In) (See Sections 4.6 and 4.8) 2) The Long Delay Current Setting, lr, is a multiple of (In). Long Delay Current Setting = lr = LD x (In). (See Section 4.2) 3) The Short Delay Current Setting (if provided) is indirectly dependent upon (In), because it is a multiple of lr, which in turn is a multiple of (In). Short Delay Current Setting = SD x lr (See Section 4.4) = SD X LD X (In). Rating Plugs for the Digitrip RMS 510 trip units are marked for and may be applied on both 50 and 60 Hz systems. A CAUTION BEFORE YOU FIT THE RA TING PLUG INTO THE TRIP UNIT, BE SURE TO CHECK THAT THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RA TING IF APPLICABLE), MA TCH THOSE PRINTED ON THE RA TING PLUG COVER. INSTALLING A RA TING PLUG THA T DOES NOT MA TCH THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA T/NG (OR SENSOR RA TING, IF APPLICA BLE}, CA N PRODUCE SERIOUS MISCOORDINA TION AND/OR FA ILURE OF THE PROTECTION SYSTEM. Complete catalog descriptions of all available rating plugs are given in the applicable circuit breaker supplementary instruction leaflets. (See Section 9) Note: Rating plugs from Digitrip models 500/600nool 800 CAN NOT be used with model 510 trip units. The connection pins are located in different positions, so that one cannot accidentally use the incorrect kind of plug.

135 I.L REFERENCES 9.1 Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies I.L I.L I.L Instructions for Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip RMS 610 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip RMS 810 Trip Unit 9.2 Type OS Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers I.B I. B AD SC SC SC B508 Instructions for Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Types OS and DSL Supplement B to Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Types OS and DSL Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Connection Diagram for Type DS Circuit Breakers 9.3 Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers I.L I.L AD SC SC SC I.S Instruction for the Systems Pow-R Breaker and Drawout Mechanism Supplementary Instructions for the Systems Pow-R Breaker used with the Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breaker Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) SPB Master Connection Diagram 9.4 Series c A-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers 29C106 29C107 29C713 AD R SC SC SC Frame Book Frame Instruction Leaflet Supplementary Instructions for Series c A-Frame used with the Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for R-Frame Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Page 15 I.L. 29C714 Master Connection Diagram for Series c R-Frame Circuit Breaker APPENDIX A ZONE INTERLOCKING Assume a ground fault of 2000 Amperes occurs and refer to Fig A.1. CASE 1: There is no Zone Selective Interlocking. (standard time delay coordination is used) Fault 3 The branch breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.1 s. Fault 2 The feeder breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.3 s. Fault 1 The breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.5 s. CASE 2: There is Zone Selective Interlocking Fault 3 The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault and Z3 will send an interlocking signal to the Z2 trip unit; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to Z1. Z1 and Z2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the branch breaker Z3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker Z2 will clear the fault in 0.3 s (as above). Similarly, in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 2 The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to the Z1 trip unit. Z1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 1 There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s. Figure A.2 presents a Zone Selective Interlocking connection diagram tor a system with two main breakers from incoming sources and a bus tie breaker. Note the blocking diode 01 is needed so that the feeder breakers can send interlocking signals to both the main and tie breakers, without having the tie breaker send itself an interlocking signal.

136 Page 16 Fig. A. 1 Q) 1 N f "' Q) c: 2 0 N t Fig. A.2 (") "' c: 0 N A ) 1600 A ) I 200 A ) Main 0.5 Sec 1200 A Feeder 0.3 Sec 400 A Branch Z1 Z Sec Z3 100A Typical Zone Interlocking (Ground Fa ult Protection) M1 0.1 Sec 0.1 Sec Notes: A1 : M2 0.5 Sec F21 A2: I.L Wiring to be twisted pair of AWG No. 14 to AWG No. 20. Route Zone Interlocking wiring separate from power conductors. DO NOT GROUND any Zone Interlock Wiring. The maximum distance between first and last zone is 250 feet (1 1 0 m). A3: A Maximum of 20 breakers may be connected in parallel in one Zone. F Sec 0.1 Sec 2 Legend =Common (Ungrounded) =Short Delay Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Short Delay Input Signal from Lower Level Zone =Ground Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Ground Input Signal from Lower Level Zone /=Fault at Location 2 Typical Zone Interlocking Connections with Two Main Breakers (M 1, M2) and a Tie Breaker (T) (Short Delay Protection) F Sec

137 I.L Page 17 NOTES

138 Page 18 I.L NOTES

139 I.L Page 19 NOTES

140 Page 20 This instruction booklet is published solely for information purposes and should not be considered all inclusive. If further information is required, you should consult Cutler-Hammer. Sale of product shown in this literature is subject to terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Cutler-Hammer Inc. selling policies or other contractual agreement between the parties. This literature is not intended to and does not enlarge or add to any such contract. The sole source governing the rights and remedies of any purchaser of this equipment is the contract between the purchaser and Cutler-Hammer Inc. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY, OR WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, ARE MADE REGARDING THE INFORMATION, RECOMMENDATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN. In no event will Cutler-Hammer Inc. be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damage or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment, plant or power system, cost of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities, or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the use of the information, recommendations and description contained herein. Cutler-Hammer Inc Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, U.S.A Style No. 7829C35H03 Printed in U.S.A./CCI I.L

141 ltcoi Cutler-Hammer I.L Table of Contents I Instructions for Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Page 1.0 General Description Protection Information Testing UL Listed Devices Principle of Operation General Trip and Operation Indicators Test Provisions DIScriminator (Making Current Release) OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) Zone Interlocking Protection Settings General Long Delay Current Settings Long Delay Time Settings Short Delay Current Settings Short Delay Time Settings Instantaneous Current Settings... 8 NO Instantaneous Current Settings Ground Fault Current Settings Ground Fault Time Delay Settings Test Procedure General When To Test Test Provision Conducting Tests Control Power Not Tripping the Breaker Tripping the Breaker Battery (Inside the Rating Plug) General Battery Check Battery Replacement Auxiliary Power Module Frame Ratings, (where applicable, Sensor Ratings) and Rating Plugs References Dig it rip RMS Trip Assemblies Type DS Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers Series C% R-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Appendix A Zone Interlocking - Example... 15, Supersedes I.L A dated September 1994 A WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL OR PERFORM MAIN TENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENERGIZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP MENT. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT NO VOLTAGE IS PRESENT BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE TASK, AND ALWAYS FOLLOW GENERALLY ACCEPTED SAFETY PROCEDURES. CUTLER-HAMMER IS NOT LIABLE FOR THE MISAPPLICATION OR MISINSTAL LATION OF ITS PRODUCTS. It is strongly urged that the user observe all recommendations, warnings and cautions relating to the safety of personnel and equipment, as well as general and local health and safety laws, codes, and procedures. The recommendations and information contained herein are based on experience and judgment, but should not be considered to be all-inclusive or covering every application or circumstance which may arise. If you have any questions or need further information or instructions, please contact your local representative, or the Customer Support Center for the type of circuit breaker you have: Circuit Call Send to Breaker Telephone FAX Type Number Number DS/DSL ( 412) (41 2) SPB (41 2) (412) Series c R-Frame (412) (412) GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.1 Protection The Digitrip RMS 51 0, illustrated in Fig. 1, is a custom application specific integrated circuit based trip unit suitable for use in types DS and DSL low voltage AC power circuit breakers and type SPB Systems Pow-R circuit breakers and Series c R-Frame molded case circuit breakers. The Digitrip RMS 510 provides true RMS current sensing for proper correlation with thermal characteristics of conductors and equipment. Interchangeable rating plugs are provided to establish the continuous current rating of each circuit breaker.

142 Page 2 The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is completely self-contained and when the circuit breaker is closed, requires no external control power to operate its protection systems. It operates from current signal levels and control power derived through current sensors integrally mounted in the circuit breaker. The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is available in six different types. Each trip unit may be equipped with a maximum of five phase and two ground (time-current) adjustments to meet specific application requirements. The types of protection available for each model include the following, which are illustrated in Figures 2.1 through 2.6: Protection Long Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Short Time Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Ground Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/ Ground Fig. 1 Circuit Breaker Assembly Cell Location Refere"ce LED's light 'RED'' to indicate cause of trip Time-Current Curve for Phase Protection lime-current Curve for Ground Protection View Settings. in Window Types Ll* LS* LSI* LIG LSG LSIG Refer to Figure Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Model LSIG with Rating Plug I.L Note*: RMS Digitrip Type Ll, LS, and LSI trip units can be applied on 3-pole or 4-pole circuit breakers for protection of the neutral circuit, IF the circuit breaker is wired and MARKED for NEUTRA L PROTECTION. Refer to the National Electric Code for appropriate application of 4-pole breakers. 1.2 Information Light Emitting Diodes (LED's) on the face of the trip unit light "Red" to indicate the reason for an automatic trip operation. The battery in the rating plug maintains the reason for trip indication following an automatic trip operation, until the "TRIP RESET" button is pushed. The "Green" LED in the lower right corner "blinks" to indicate the trip unit is operating normally. The battery in the rating plug is "OK" if the LED lights "Green" when the "battery check" button next to it is pushed. (See Section 6.). Note: The Digitrip RMS 510 provides all of its protection functions regardless of the status of the battery. The battery serves only to maintain the indication of the reason for automatic trip. Trip Uni: Operational Status "Blinking Green"=OK Adjust Protection Settongs for Desired Values with Rotary Swi:ches R-.i=rame Rating Plug

143 I.L Fig Long Time/Instantaneous Protection (L I) Fig. 2.2 Long Time/Short Time Protection (LS) Fig. 2.3 Fig. 2.4 Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous Protection (LSI) Long Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LIG) Page 3

144 Page 4 Fig Testing Long Time/Short Time/Ground/Protection (LSG) To test the trip unit, use the integral test panel. (See Section 5.0.) 2.0 UL LISTED DEVICES Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Units are "Listed" by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Under UL File E7819, for use in types DS, DSL, SPB and Series C A-Frame circuit breakers. 3.0 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 3.1 General The Digitrip RMS 510 trip unit is designed for use in industrial circuit breaker environments where the ambient temperatures can range from -20 C to +85 C and rarely exceed 70 to 75 C. If, however, temperatures in the neighborhood of the trip unit do exceed this range, the trip unit performance may be degraded. In order to insure that the tripping function is not compromised due to an over-temperature condition, the Digitrip RMS 510 microcomputer chip has a built-in over-temperature protection feature, factory set to trip the breaker if the chip temperature exceeds 95 C. If over-temperature is the reason for the trip, the Long Delay Time LED will light "RED". Fig. 2.6 I.L Long Time/Short Time/Instantaneous/Ground Protection (LSIG) The Digitrip RMS 510 Trip unit provides three basic functions: Protection, Information and Testing. A typical trip unit and rating plug are illustrated in Fig. 1. Individual product instruction leaflets referenced in Section 9.0 illustrate typical Digitrip RMS Trip Units installed in specific breakers. The trip unit employs the Cutler-Hammer Inc. custom designed integrated circuit S)lRE + chip, which includes a microcomputer to perform its numeric and logic functions. The principle of operation is described by the block diagram shown in Fig. 3. In the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, all required sensing and tripping power to operate its protection function is derived from the current sensors in the circuit breaker. The secondary currents from these sensors provide the correct input information for the protection functions, as well as tripping power, whenever the circuit breaker is carrying current. These current signals develop analog voltages across the appropriate calibrating resistors including: 1) Phase currents 2) Ground current (when supplied) 3) Rating plug The resulting analog voltages are digitized by the custom designed integrated circuits.

145 I.L Fig. 3 TypoLai Phase Or G ourd C hl>rahon Aes sto Digitrip RMS 510 Block Diagram with Breaker Interface Integrated Circuit S!!RE+ TM Chip ;s:;; : o,';,. P.c :.. "ll SeeS9ct10n' TnpUnn Oper t'"ll Statu< lnrl ator IFiost>on(l GREEN tndocsteo OK s... s.. cuun l2 The microcomputer, in cyclic fashion, repeatedly scans 3.3 Test Provisions (See Section 5.0) the voltage values across each calibrating resistor and enters these values into its Random Access Memory 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) (RAM). These data are used to calculate true RMS current values, which are then repeatedly compared with the (For Types LS and LSG trip units only.) When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with protection function settings and other operating data an adjustable instantaneous protection setting, i.e., types stored in the Read Only Memory (ROM). The software LS or LSG, a making current release (or DIScriminator) program then determines whether to initiate protection circuit is provided. This circuit will prevent the circuit functions, including tripping the breaker through the low breaker from being closed and latched-in on a faulted circuit. The non-adjustable release is pre-set at eleven (1 1) energy trip device (Flux Transfer Shunt Trip or Direct Trip Actuator) in the circuit breaker. times the installed rating plug current (In)- 3.2 Trip and Operation Indicators The LEOs, shown in Figs. 1 and , on the face of the trip unit, light "RED" to indicate the reason for any automatic trip operation. As indicated in Figs , each LED is strategically located in the related segment of the time-current curve depicted on the face of the trip unit. The reason for trip is identified by the segment of the time-current curve where the LED is lighted "RED". Following an automatic trip operation, the back-up battery, continues to supply power to the LEOs as indicated in Figs. 3 and 6. To check the status of the battery, see Section 6. Push the ''Trip Reset" button shown in Fig. 1, to turn "Off" the LEOs following a trip operation. A green colored LED, as shown in Fig. 1, indicates the operational status of the trip unit. Once the load current through the circuit breaker exceeds approximately 10% of the frame/current sensor rating, the green LED will flash "On" and "Off" once each second, to indicate the trip unit is energized and operating properly. Note: If the LED is steadily "GREEN", i.e. not flashing, the trip unit is not ready. Page 5 The making current release is enabled only for the first ten (1 0) cycles following an initial circuit breaker closing operation, provided the load current exceeds approximately 10% of the circuit breaker frame (or current sensor) rating. Should the load current through the circuit breaker drop to less than the 10% value, the release will reset. The release, once reset, will remain enabled until the load current passing through the circuit breaker has exceeded the 10% value for 10 cycles. The making current release will trip the circuit breaker instantaneously. In the event the breaker is intended to close (but not to trip out again) into a circuit whose current could initially be higher than 11 x In, it is possible to make the DIScriminator inactive. If the breaker does close onto a fully rated fault current, when the DIScriminator is inactive, the breaker will wait for the full short-time delay setting before it trips. The DIScriminator (making current release) can be made inactive by turning the "OVERRIDE/" setting switch (nearest the bottom edge of the trip unit) from the "DIS" position, to the "[BLANK]" position. (See Figs. 2.2 and 2.5.)

146 Page 6 Notes: 1 This switch has eight (8) positions, and seven (7) of them show "DIS" in the window, while ONLY ONE position shows "[BLANK]". 2 When the "OVERRIDE/" window shows "[BLANK]", the only fast-acting high short-circuit protection available is the OVERRIDE [Fixed Instantaneous]. (See 3.5 below.) 3.5 OVERRIDE (Fixed Instantaneous) (For Types LS And LSG Trip Units Only) When the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit is not equipped with an adjustable instantaneous setting, i.e., types LS or LSG, the Fixed Instantaneous "Override" analog trip circuit is automatically pre-set to a value no greater than the short-time withstand current rating of the circuit breaker in which the trip unit is installed. Since the specific values vary for different circuit breaker types and ratings, refer to time-current curves, listed in Section 9, for the values applicable to your breaker. If breaker trips due to high instantaneous current, the "OVERRIDE" LED will light "RED". 3.6 Zone Interlocking Zone Selective Interlocking (or Zone Interlocking) is available (see Fig. 3) for Digitrip RMS Trip Units having Short Delay and/or Ground Fault protection. Zone Selective Interlocking provides the fastest possible tripping for faults within the breaker's zone of protection, and yet also provides positive coordination among all breakers in the system (mains, ties, feeders and downstream breakers) to limit the outage to the affected part of the system only. When Zone Interlocking is enabled, a fault within the breaker's zone of protection will cause the RMS DIG ITRIP trip unit to: a) Trip the affected breaker instantaneously, and at the same time b) Send a signal to upstream RMS DIGITRIP trip units to restrain from tripping immediately. The restraining signal causes the upstream breakers to follow their set coordination times, so that only the minimum service is disrupted, while the fault is cleared in the shortest time possible. (This signal requires only a single pair of wires from the output terminals of the downstream breaker's trip unit to the input terminals of the upstream breaker's trip unit. For specific instructions see the applicable connection diagrams for your breaker listed in Section 9.0.) I.L Note: If a breaker (M) receives a Zone Interlocking signal from another breaker (F), but the fault current level is less than the trip unit setting for breaker (M), the signal from the other breaker (F) will not cause breaker (M) to trip. A CAUTION IF ZONE INTERLOCKING IS NOT TO BE USED (I.E. STANDARD TIME-DELAY COORDINATION ONLY IS INTENDED), THE ZONE INTERLOCKING TERMINALS MUST BE CONNECTED WITH JUMPER WIRES, AS SPECIFIED ON THE CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR YOUR BREAKER (SEE SECTION 9.0), SO THE TIME DELAY SETTINGS WILL PROVIDE THE INTENDED COORDINATION. For an example of how Zone Selective Interlocking may be used, See Appendix A. 4.0 PROTECTION SETTINGS 4.1 General Prior to placing circuit breaker in operation, each trip unit protection setting must be set to the values specified by the engineer responsible for the installation. The number of settings that must be made is determined by the protector model supplied as illustrated in Figs. 2.1 through 2.6. Each setting is made with a rotary switch, using a small screwdriver. The selected setting for each adjustment appears in its respective rectangular viewing window as illustrated in Fig. 1. The installed rating plug establishes the maximum continuous current rating of the circuit breaker (In). Instantaneous and ground current settings are defined in multiples of (In) To illustrate the effect of each protection curve setting, simulated Time-Current curves are pictured on the face of the trip unit. The rotary switch to make each setting is located nearest that portion of the simulated Time-Current curve it controls. Should an automatic "trip" occur (as a result of the current exceeding the pre-selected value), the LED in the appropriate segment of the simulated Time-Current curve will light "RED" indicating the reason for "trip". The available settings, along with the illustrated effect of changing the settings, are given in Figs. 4.1 through 4.7.

147 I. L Long Delay Current Setting There are eight (B) available Long Delay Settings, as illustrated in Fig Each setting, called ''1/' is expressed as a multiple (ranging from.5 to 1) of the rating plug current (In). Note: "t," is also the basis for the Short-Delay Current Setting. (See Section 4.4.) Fig Long Delay Setting 1, OJx In = lr 0 Long Delay Current Settings 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting t, Available Settings.5,.6,.7,.8,.85,.9,.95, 1 In Multiples of Rating Plug Amperes U n l There are eight (B) available Long Delay Time Settings, as illustrated in Fig. 4.2, ranging from 2 to 24 seconds. These settings are the total clearing times when the current value equals six (6) times t,. Fig. 4.2 Notes: Long Delay Time Settings Available Settings 2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24 Seconds at 6 Times Long Delay Setting (1, ) 1) In addition to the standard Long Delay Protection Element, the Digitrip RMS 510 trip unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. If a breaker is reclosed soon after a Long Delay Trip, and the current again exceeds the Long Delay Setting, 1, the LTM automatically reduces the time to trip, to Page 7 allow for the fact that the load circuit temperature is already higher than normal, due to the prior overload condition. Each time an overload condition is repeated, the LTM causes the breaker to trip in a time progressively earlier than the "Long Delay Time Setting". When the load current returns to normal, the LTM begins to reset; and after about 1 0 minutes it has reset fully, so that next Long Delay trip time will again be the "Setting" value. In certain applications it may be desirable to disable the LTM function. The LTM function can be disabled by (first opening the breaker and then) removing the Rating Plug (See Figures 1 and 6), and lastly moving the LTM jumper (inside the rating plug cavity, See figure 4.2.1) to its "INAC TIVE" connection. (You can enable the LTM function again any time you wish by moving the LTM jumper back to its original "ACTIVE" connection.),- Rating Plug Cavity -----vr----_._,_ Standard from Factory "L TM Active" ---- Rating Plug Cavity -t '-...J Fig Long Time Memory "LTM" Jumper The action of the LTM is a factor to consider in performing multiple Long Delay Time tests. (See Section 5.4.) 2) There is a condition under which the Long Delay Trip LED can erroneously indicate a LOT has occurred, even though the breaker is still closed. This can happen when an overload current momentarily exceeds the Long Delay Current Setting, 1, so that the Long Delay LED flashes "RED" to indicate the overload condition. Then if, at the very moment when the LED is "ON", the load current would then suddenly drop to a value less than 10% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating, the trip unit stops functioning while the "4bit Latch Chip" (See Fig. 3) is set and the LED remains Lighted. If the current would again increase to a value above the Long Delay Current Setting, t,, and then return to normal, the

148 .c om I.L Page B 4.5 Short Delay Time Setting 4.7 NO Instantaneous Current Setting For types LS and LSG trip units, please see Sections 3.4 DIScriminator (Making Current Release) and 3.5 OVER RIDE (Fixed I nstantaneous), for available fast-acting high short-circuit protection. 4.8 Ground Fault Current Setting The eight (8) G round Fau lt Current Settings are labeled with the code letters "A" through "K" (except there are no "G" or "I" settings), as illustrated in Fig In general, the specific current settings range from 0.25 to 1.0 times (In), the rating plug value, but cannot exceed A. The specific G round Current Settings for each letter are listed in Table 1 and on the applicable Time-Current curve for the breaker. ar As illustrated in Fig. 4.4, there are two different Short Delay curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 1 2t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the short delay cu rrent range than will the flat response. ua ls There are eight (8) available Short Delay Current Set tings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times 1, and the other two settings are "S 1 " or "S2" times 1,. (REMEMBER: I, is the Long Delay Current Setting). The val ues that "S 1 " and "S2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Current Curves referenced in Section 9.0. an 4.4 Short Delay Current Setting other two settings are "M 1 " or "M2" times (In). The val ues that "M 1 " and "M2" have depend upon the type of circuit breaker, and are specified both on the rating plug label (see Fig. 6), and on the applicable Time-Cu rrent Curves referenced i n Section 9.0. tm LOT will reset itself. You can of course, manually clear the LOT (or any other trip indication) at any time, by pushing the "PUSH to RESET" button. (See Figure 1.) Fig ; : -L ''t1 In Multiples of Long Delay Setting {I, J L ::....: J } and 52 Values are Specified on Rating Plug - - :\ _. 1, Seconds WI h e tri 51 \ e : , 3. 4, 5, 6. S,, S, ca '...;fi" {-''>., lp --. Short Delay 'U. -. I I'::-._,, r Setting rl, "..,.--, [j] ' I, Sho. Delay T1me Sec. Avai lable Settings Flat Respon, Short Delay Current Settings.E lec Five flat (. 1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2t (. 1 *,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk ( *) that appears in the viewing window. The 12 t response is applicable to cu rrents less than eight (8) times 1,, the Long Delay Setting. For currents g reater than 8 times 1,, the 1 2t response reverts to the flat response. Note: See also Section 3.6, Zone Interlocking, above. w 4.6 Instantaneous Current Setting i5 I "'-f 1,',. 1 lj f,, _ ] ill ',, I... ' "*"In V iewin g Window Indicates l't Shape Fig. 4.4 J I I B x I, N w I I r'l 1 1 w Ft Shape Returns to Flat Response at CurrE 1ts Higher than 8 x 1,. 1,.3*,.5* Seconds with 12t Shape Short Delay Time Settings ww There are eight (8) available Instantaneous Cu rrent Set tings, as illustrated in Fig Six settings are in the range from 2 to 6 times (In) the rating plug value, and the Effective May 1 997

149 .c om I.L Page 9 [Ij x I n (S) I II, I L I I : I cr- r-- TABLE Ava ilable Settings I I GROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS (AM PERES)CD Cii LU a: LU c.. Instantaneous Current Settings (!) :::1...J c.. (!) z BOO a: Cl LU...J...J (/) K H F BB BB BO BO B 1B B BO BO 600 BOO B B BO BOO BOO B B / BOO tm Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Espe cially when the single phase current is low, without the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. :::!; s E D c B A In Multiples of Rating P l u g Amperes O n ) M1 and M2 Values are Specified on Rat i n g Plug Fig G ROUND FAULT CURRENT SETTINGS 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, M,, M, : --\ \ I_ - 1 ua ls l J Setting lnst. 1 1""1 an r-, 1 11 r-' []J x l n w ww Specific Values Given on C i rcuit Breaker Time-Current Curve and i n Table 1 Ground Fault Current Settings.E Fig. 4.6 m lec 8, C, D, E, F, H, K A, tri e Available Sett i n g s ca Gnd-Fault Setti n g lp ar CD Tolerances on settings are ±1 0% of values shown. Refer to Type DS, type SPB or Series C R-Frame supplemental instruction leaflets given in Section 9 for list of available rating plugs for each type circuit breaker. Effective May Ground Fault Time Delay Setting As illustrated in Fig. 4.7, there are two different G round Fault curve shapes, i.e., fixed time (flat) or 12t response. The shape selected depends on the type of selective coordination chosen. The 1 2t response will provide a longer time delay in the low-end of the ground fault cur rent range than will the flat response. Five flat (. 1,.2,.3,.4,.5 sec.) and three 1 2t (. 1 *,.3*,.5* sec.) response time delay settings are available. The 1 2t response settings are identified by the suffix asterisk (*) that appears in the setting viewing window. The 12t response is applicable to currents less than times the ampere rating of the installed rating plug (In) For currents g reater than x In the 12t response reverts to the flat response.

150 .c om I.L Page 1 0 \\ \ T1me Sec., ) QJ 0 Gnd Fault \ ""' I I I I I I I l \_ i: I \... _ I] I / ] : II, Window Shape I - - : '...'....,...f.. ' ' ' I ' '' I ',..._ - - -, Fig. 5 12t Shape Returns to Flat Response at Approximately n. 1 *,.3*,.5* Seconds with l't Shape Ground Fault Time Delay Settings ca 5.0 TEST PROCEDURES DANGER tri A lec DO N OT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL, TEST OR PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS ENER G IZED. DEATH OR SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED EQUIP M ENT..E DE-ENERGIZE THE C IRCUIT AND DISCONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER B E FORE PERFORMING MAINTE NANCE OR TESTS. As illustrated in Figs. 1 and 5, an integral test panel is provided to test the D igitrip RMS 51 0 Trip Unit. w Several no-trip settings are provided to check the trip unit operation without actually tripping the circuit breaker. ww 0 TRIP; - Push, then release Trip Reset button to reset Trip Unit. Required following all automatic trip and test operations. Integral Test Panel (Lower Right Corner of Trip Unit) A CAUTIO N TESTING A CIRCUIT BREAKER U NDER "TRI P CON DITIONS" WHILE IT IS IN SERVICE AND CARRYING LOAD CURRENT, WHETHER DONE BY INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL M EANS, IS NOT RECOMMEN DED. ANY TRIPPING O PERATION WILL CAUSE DISRUP TION OF SERVICE AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM U N NECESSARY SWITCH ING OF CONNECTED EQUIPME NT. lp Note: See also Section 3.6 on Zone Interlocking. 5.1 General O "6T" = Phase Current Test at 6xl n and TRIPS breaker; " 1, 2, 3, 8 or 1 0" x I = Phase Current Test N01, reaker "GFT" = Ground Current Test and TRIPS breaker; "GF" = Ground Current Test NO breaker TRIP. See Section for inser vice test trip limitations. tm I C CD Push, then release Test button to test. Test operation begins with release of pushbutton. I 0 Fig Seconds with Flat Response, 1 I I l't Unit Status _ I "'"In Viewing Indicates Available Settings ar : Trip Reset Test r: := -: 1 L Available "Test Amps" Settings ua ls ' Breaker Trips At 6T and GFT Test Amps [ill ':D X I n an \..,.. TESTING OF A CIRCUIT BREAKER THAT RES U LTS IN THE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE DONE ONLY WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN THE "TEST" OR "DISCONNECTED" CELL POSITIONS OR WHILE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS ON A TEST BENCH. To preserve the primary protection function of the trip unit, all in-service testing u nder ''Trip" or "No-Trip" condi tions are only performed at load current values no greater than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting, 1,. Any attempt to conduct in-service testing when the load cur rent exceeds 50% of 1,, wil l not be executed by the trip unit. Since the Digitrip RMS Trip Unit is completely self powered using energy derived from the current sensors installed in the circuit breaker, all in-service tests con ducted should be conducted with the auxiliary control power module, shown in Fig. 7, plugged into the trip u n it. This action will avoid difficulties caused by load cu rrent levels that are too low to operate the tri p unit. Effective May 1 997

151 I.L When To Test Tests can be conducted with the breaker in the "connected" cell position while carrying load current. However, as stated in the caution note in Section 5. 1, good practice will limit circuit breaker in-service "trip tests", where required, to maintenance periods during times of minimum load conditions. Testing, prior to start-up can best be accomplished with the breaker out of its cell or in the "Test", "Disconnected" or "Withdrawn" (or Removed) cell positions. Note: Since time-current settings are based on desired system coordination and protection schemes, the protection settings selected and preset in accordance with Section 4.0 above should not be altered during or as a part of any routine test sequence. 5.3 Test Provision As indicated in Fig. 5, six different "Test Amps" settings (1, 2, 3, 6T, 8 and 1 OX In) are available for testing the phase elements of the trip unit, and two (GF, GFT) are provided for testing the ground elements. A CAUTION A SETTING OF EITHER 6T OR GFT WILL TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. (SEE SECTION BELOW.) For any combination of the phase protection settings, an appropriate "No Trip" condition can be set to test the long time, short time and instantaneous trip settings without tripping the circuit breaker. In the "GP' test position, the level of test current based on In, is adequate to demonstrate the operating condition of the trip unit without tripping the circuit breaker. This is a functional check only, not a calibration. 5.4 Conducting Tests 1) Before starting any test sequence, check the Unit Status (Green LED) in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) to be sure it is blinking on and off about once each second, which indicates that the trip unit is functioning normally. In the event the Unit Status LED is not blinking, install an Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7), or if you have one already, check to see that it is connected correctly. 2) If the circuit breaker is carrying current, check for the following conditions: 3) Page 1 1 a) the current is not less than 10% of the breaker frame (or current sensor) rating; be sure the "GREEN" Unit Status LED (in the lower right corner of the trip unit (See Figs. 1 and 5) is blinking on and off (indicating that there is enough current flowing to provide the power necessary to operate the trip unit). In the event the Unit Status LED is either lighted "GREEN" or "OFF" continuously, there is NOT enough current flowing to power the trip unit; and an APM (See Fig. 7) should be installed before proceeding with the test. and b) the current is not more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting (1,); because the trip unit will not execute your test instructions when it senses that the current through the breaker exceeds the 50% level. When performing tests on the Long Delay element, be aware that in addition to the standard protection element, the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit also has a Long Time Memory function (LTM), which serves to protect load circuits from the effects of repeated overload conditions. (See NOTE 1 under Section 4.3 Long Delay Time Setting.) The action of the LT M will have the same effect of advancing the Long Delay Trip Time if multiple Long Delay Time tests are performed repeatedly - as one might do in making single phase tests on each pole of a breaker in succession, for example. If you have sufficient experience in performing tests with this kind of accelerated trip timing, you may be comfortable with the results of tests performed in quick succession. However, if there is any question, you may simply wait about ten ( 1 0) minutes after a Long Delay Trip for the LT M to reset, before you check the next pole Control Power For testing the trip unit, an optional Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) as shown in Fig. 7 is recommended. This Auxiliary Power Module, which operates from a separate 120 Vac supply, may be used when a drawout circuit breaker is in any of its four cell positions, i.e., "Connected", ''Test", "Disconnected" and "Withdrawn" (or "Removed.") Note: For Testing Purposes Only: When using an external single phase current source to test low level ground fault current settings, it is advisable to use the Auxiliary Power Module (APM) (See Fig. 7). Especially when the single phase current is low, without

152 Page 12 the APM it may appear as if the trip unit does not respond until the current is well-above the set value, leading the tester to believe there is an error in the trip unit when there is none. The reason this occurs is that the single phase test current is not a good simulation of the normal three phase circuit. If three phase current had been flowing, the trip unit would actually have performed correctly. Use the APM for correct trip unit performance whenever single phase tests are made. Plug in the Auxiliary Power Module (Cat. No. PRTAAPM) to insure control power is available for testing. When the APM is properly connected the "GREEN" Unit Status LED will blink on and off about once per second Not Tripping the Breaker 1. Place the "Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the six "No Trip" test settings, i.e., 1, 2, 3, 8, or 10, x In, or GF Depress the (Black) 'Test" pushbutton and release it - the test starts when the pushbutton is released. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected "No Trip" test value, then the LED related to that function will turn on signifying successful completion of the test action. Note: During the long delay tests the Long Delay LED flashes "RED". 4. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the 'Trip Reset" pushbutton. All LEDs lighted by the "No Trip" test action should turn "OFF". Should an actual overload or fault condition occur during an in-service, "No Trip Test" sequence, the protection function will override the test function, and the circuit breaker will trip automatically in accordance with the actual Time-Current settings. Note: The "Trip Reset" pushbutton may be depressed at any time. However, should a test already be in progress, the test would be aborted. A test initiated via the integral test panel may be aborted at any time by depressing the "Trip Reset" pushbutton Tripping the Breaker 1. Make sure that the circuit breaker is carrying no current. (See CAUTION notes under Section 5.1.) NOTE: In the event it is decided to perform a "Breaker Trip Test" while load current is flowing, make sure the circuit breaker is carrying no more than 50% of the Long Delay Current Setting 1,. (The I.L trip unit will not execute your instructions to Test itself, when the load current exceeds 50% of lr) 2. Place the "Test Amps" selector switch (See Fig. 5) in one of the two 'Trip" test settings, i.e., 6T or GFT. 3. Depress the black "Test" pushbutton (See Fig. 5) and release it - the test is initiated when the pushbutton is released. 4. Should any of the various protection settings be less than the selected 'Test Amps" value, the circuit breaker will trip and the LED related to that function will light "RED". 5. Reset the trip unit by depressing and releasing the 'Trip Reset" pushbutton (See Fig. 5). All LEDs lighted by the 'Trip" test action should turn "OFF". 6.0 BATTERY (INSIDE THE RATING PLUG) 6.1 General The battery has no part in the protection function of the trip unit. As indicated in Figs. 3 and 6, the battery is provided to maintain the "RED" LED indication of the cause of TRIP in the Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. The battery is located in the rating plug along with a battery check pushbutton and a green battery check LED. 6.2 Battery Check The battery is a long life, lithium photo type unit. The status of the battery can be checked at any time by depressing the battery check pushbutton and observing the "GREEN" LED as shown in Fig. 6. If the battery check LED does not light "GREEN", replace the battery. The condition of the battery has no effect on the protection function of the trip unit. Even with the battery removed, the unit will still trip the breaker in accordance with its settings. However, without the battery, the cause of TRIP LED will not be lighted "RED". If the battery is replaced (or if an Auxiliary Power Module is plugged into the trip unit), one or more of the cause of Trip LED's may be illuminated. The user should push the red "TRIP RESET" button to turn off the indications, and the trip unit will be ready to indicate the next cause of trip. 6.3 Battery Replacement The battery can be easily replaced from the front of the trip unit by lowering the hinged cover of the rating plug as shown in Fig. 6. The battery can then be removed by pulling the battery tab as shown in Fig. 6.

153 I.L Note: The battery can be replaced at any time, even while the circuit breaker is in service, without affecting the operation of the circuit breaker or its protection function. A CAUTION CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED WHEN REPLACING A BATTERY TO INSURE THAT THE CORRECT POLARITIES ARE OBSERVED. POLARITY MARK INGS ARE SHOWN ON THE RATING PLUG WHEN THE HINGED COVER IS OPEN AS INDICATED IN FIG. G. The replacement battery should be the same type or equivalent. Acceptable 3.0 volt lithium batteries may be Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Alltmg Plug is for Type DS Circuit Breakers Only Ratmg Plugs for R-Frame and SPB Breakers are Similar Raung Plug Identification "Battery Check" Pushbuttor ----' Typical Rating Plug Values for Short Delay S1 and S2 Instantaneous M1 and M2 Settings Battery "OK" if LED Lights "GREEN" when "'Battery Check" Button '"' Pushed Trip Unit Connector (Fits into Keyed Cavity in Top Right Corner of Trip Unit See Fig 1) -- Cutler-Hammtr Auxiliary P:wN r Module tat ffl!aapm 12WAC r11!wl Sll :a?voc 1:twtll (.! A ;;lit \.In i)lq WI 'f na l>i r;;!!m S Auxiliary Power Module Page 13 obtained from the following companies under their type designation indicated: Company Varta Batteries, Inc. 150 Clarbrook Road Elmsford, N.Y Duracell South Broadway Tarrytown, N.Y (914) Sanyo Electric Inc. Battery Division 200 Riser Road Little Ferry, N.J Polantv Marks Model CR 1/3N DL 1/3N CR 1/3N Battery Removal Tab Satterv

154 Page AUXILIARY POWER MODULE The Auxiliary Power Module or APM (Cat No. PRTAAPM), illustrated in Fig. 7, is an encapsulated power supply that requires a 120 Vac input at either 50 or 60 Hz. It provides an output of 32 Vdc (nominal 40 Vdc open circuit) which can be used for testing a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit. When a drawout circuit breaker is equipped with a Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit, it can be conveniently set and tested while the circuit breaker is out of its cell or in its cell in the "Test", "Disconnect" or "Withdrawn" positions by using the Auxiliary Power Module. The Auxiliary Power Module is equipped with a unique plug-in connector suitable only for plugging into the keyed receptacle in the upper right corner of a Digitrip RMS Trip Unit as shown in Fig. 1. This prohibits the possible use of an incorrect type power module. 8.0 FRAME RATINGS, (WHERE APPLICABLE, SENSOR RATINGS) AND RATING PLUGS The Frame Rating of a circuit breaker is the maximum RMS current it can carry continuously. The maximum Short-Circuit Current Rating of the Circuit breaker are usually related to the Frame Rating as well. It is often times desirable to be able to choose a current value (In), less than the full frame rating, to be the basis for the coordination of the circuit breaker's protection functions, without affecting its short-circuit current capability. For the Digitrip 510 trip unit this is implemented by changing the Rating Plug (and/or Current Sensors, where applicable - See your circuit breaker instructions (listed in Section 9.0 below) to determine if this applies to your circuit breaker). The (Current) Sensor Rating (where applicable) is the maximum RMS current the circuit breaker can carry with the specified current sensors installed. The Sensor Rating can be the same or less than the Frame Rating, but not greater. The Rating Plug (See Fig. 6) fits into a special cavity to complete the trip unit (See Fig. 1 ). Rating plugs have two current ratings listed on their covers (See Fig. 6): 1) the "Must be used with Frame Rated" cur- I.L rent value (or "Sensor Rated", if applicable), and 2) "In (Rated I) =" current value. This latter value, (In) is the basis for the trip unit current settings: 1) 2) 3) The Instantaneous and Ground Current Settings (if provided) are multiples of (In) (See Sections 4.6 and 4.8) The Long Delay Current Setting, 1,, is a multiple of (In). Long Delay Current Setting = 1, = LD x (In). (See Section 4.2) The Short Delay Current Setting (if provided) is indirectly dependent upon (In), because it is a multiple of 1,, which in turn is a multiple of (In) Short Delay Current Setting =SOx 1, = SO X LD X (In). (See Section 4.4) Rating Plugs for the Digitrip RMS 510 trip units are marked for and may be applied on both 50 and 60 Hz systems. A CAUTION BEFORE YOU FIT THE RA TING PLUG INTO THE TRIP UNIT, BE SURE TO CHECK THAT THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RA TING IF APPLICABLE), MA TCH THOSE PRINTED ON THE RA TING PLUG COVER. INSTALLING A RA TING PLUG THA T DOES NOT MA TCH THE BREAKER TYPE AND FRAME RA TING (OR SENSOR RATING, IF APPLICA BLE), CA N PRODUCE SERIOUS MISCOORDINA TION AND/OR FA ILURE OF THE PROTECTION SYSTEM. Complete catalog descriptions of all available rating plugs are given in the applicable circuit breaker supplementary instruction leaflets. (See Section 9) Note: Rating plugs from Digitrip models 500/600/700/ 800 CAN NOT be used with model 51 0 trip units. The connection pins are located in different positions, so that one cannot accidentally use the incorrect kind of plug.

155 l.l REFERENCES 9.1 Digitrip RMS Trip Assemblies I.L I.L I.L Instructions for Digitrip RMS 510 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip RMS 610 Trip Unit Instructions for Digitrip RMS 81 0 Trip Unit 9.2 Type OS Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers I.B I. B AD SC SC SC B508 Instructions for Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Types OS and DSL Supplement B to Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Types DS and DSL Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Connection Diagram for Ty pe DS Circuit Breakers 9.3 Type SPB Systems Pow-R Breakers I.L I.L AD SC SC SC I.S Instruction for the Systems Pow-R Breaker and Drawout Mechanism Supplementary Instructions for the Systems Pow-R Breaker used with the Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Type SPB Systems Pow- R Breaker Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) SPB Master Connection Diagram 9.4 Series c R-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers 29C C107 29C713 AD R SC SC SC Frame Book Frame Instruction Leaflet Supplementary Instructions for Series c R-Frame used with the Digitrip RMS Trip Units Typical Time-Current Characteristic Curves for R-Frame Circuit Breakers Instantaneous (I) Long Delay and Short Delay (LS) Ground (G) Page 15 I.L. 29C714 Master Connection Diagram for Series c R-Frame Circuit Breaker APPENDIX A ZONE INTERLOCKING Assume a ground fault of 2000 Amperes occurs and refer to Fig A.1. CASE 1 : There is no Zone Selective Interlocking. (standard time delay coordination is used) Fault 3 The branch breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.1 s. Fault 2 The feeder breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.3 s. Fault 1 The breaker will trip clearing the fault in 0.5 s. CASE 2: There is Zone Selective Interlocking Fault 3 The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault and Z3 will send an interlocking signal to the Z2 trip unit; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to Z1. Z1 and Z2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the branch breaker Z3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker Z2 will clear the fault in 0.3 s (as above). Similarly, in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 2 The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s to clear the fault; and Z2 will send an interlocking signal to the Z1 trip unit. Z1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker Z2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker Z1 will clear the fault in 0.5 s (as above). Fault 1 There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the trip in 0.03 s. Figure A.2 presents a Zone Selective Interlocking connection diagram tor a system with two main breakers from incoming sources and a bus tie breaker. Note the blocking diode 01 is needed so that the feeder breakers can send interlocking signals to both the main and tie breakers, without having the tie breaker send itself an interlocking signal.

156 Page 16 Fig. A. 1 t "' 6 1 N t N "' 6 2 N t Fig. A.2 "' "' c 0 N 3 I 3200 A ) 1600 A ) 200 A ) Main 0.5 Sec 1200 A Feeder 0.3 Sec 400 A Branch Z1 Z2 0.1 Sec Z3 100A Typical Zone Interlocking (Ground Fa ult Protection) M1 0.1 Sec 0.1 Sec I.L Notes: A1 : Wiring to be twisted pair of AWG No. 14 to AWG No. 20. Route Zone Interlocking wiring separate from power conductors. DO NOT GROUND any Zone Interlock Wiring. M2 0.5 Sec F21 A2: The maximum distance between first and last zone is 250 feet (11 0 m). A3: A Maximum of 20 breakers may be connected in parallel in one Zone. F22 2 Legend =Common (Ungrounded) =Short Delay Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Short Delay Input Signal from Lower Level Zone =Ground Output Signal to Higher Level Zone =Ground Input Signal from Lower Level Zone /eault at Location 2 F Sec 0.1 Sec 0.1 Sec Typical Zone Interlocking Connections with Two Main Breakers (M 1, M2) and a Tie Breaker (T) (Short Delay Protection)

157 I.L Page 17 NOTES

158 Page 18 I.L NOTES